Maths Frameworking PB 7.

2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page i

Year 7, Pupil Book 2

NEW MATHS
FRAMEWORKING
Matches the revised KS3 Framework

Kevin Evans, Keith Gordon, Trevor Senior, Brian Speed

Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page ii

Contents

Introduction vi

CHAPTER 1 Algebra 1

Sequences and rules 1

Finding missing terms 2

Functions and mappings 4

Using letter symbols to represent functions 5

The general term (nth term) 8

An nth term investigation 9

National Test questions 10

Functional Maths – Valencia Planetarium 12

CHAPTER 2 Number 1

Decimals 14

Ordering decimals 16

Directed numbers 18

Estimates 20

Column method for addition and subtraction 22

Solving problems 23

National Test questions 25

CHAPTER 3 Geometry and measures 1

Length, perimeter and area 27

Perimeter and area of rectangles 29

3-D shapes 31

Surface area of cubes and cuboids 34

National Test questions 36

Functional Maths – Design a bedroom 40

ii
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page iii

CHAPTER 4 Number 2

Fractions 42
Fractions and decimals 44
Adding and subtracting fractions 46
Equivalences 48
Solving problems 50
National Test questions 52

CHAPTER 5 Statistics 1

Mode, median and range 54

The mean 56
Statistical diagrams 59
Probability 62
Experimental probability 65
National Test questions 68
Functional Maths – School sports day 70

CHAPTER 6 Algebra 2

Algebraic terms and expressions 72

Rules of algebra 73
Simplifying expressions 75
Formulae 77
Equations 78
National Test questions 80
Functional Maths – Skiing trip 82

CHAPTER 7 Geometry and measures 2

Lines and angles 84

Calculating angles 86
Coordinates 88
National Test questions 91

CHAPTER 8 Statistics 2

Using a tally chart 93

Using the correct data 95
Grouped frequency 96
Data collection 98
National Test questions 101
Functional Maths – Be a school chef for a day 104

iii
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page iv

CHAPTER 9 Numbers and measures 3

Rounding 106
The four operations 109
BODMAS 110
Long multiplication and long division 112
Efficient calculations 114
Calculating with measurements 116
Solving problems 118
National Test questions 119
Functional Maths – What’s your carbon footprint 122

CHAPTER 10 Algebra 3

Square numbers and square roots 124

Triangle numbers 126
From mappings to graphs 127
Naming graphs 128
Naming sloping lines 130
National Test questions 132

CHAPTER 11 Geometry and measures 3

Measuring and drawing angles 134

Constructions 136
Solving geometrical problems 138
National Test questions 140

CHAPTER 12 Number 4

Percentages 142
Ratio and proportion 144
Calculating ratios and proportions 146
Solving problems 148
National Test questions 150
Functional Maths – Smoothie bar 152

CHAPTER 13 Algebra 4

Solving ‘brick wall’ problems 154

Solving square-and-circle problems 155
Triangle-and-circle problems 158
National Test questions 160
Functional Maths – Child trust fund 162

iv
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page v

CHAPTER 14 Geometry and measures 4

Line symmetry 164

Rotational symmetry 166
Reflections 167
Rotations 170
Translations 171
National Test questions 173
Functional Maths – Landmark spotting 176

CHAPTER 15 Statistics 3

Pie charts 178

Comparing data 180
Statistical surveys 182
Probabilities from two way tables 183
National Test questions 186

CHAPTER 16 Number 5

Adding and subtracting decimals 188

Multiplying and dividing decimals 190
Using a calculator 191
Fractions of quantities 193
Percentages of quantities 195
Solving problems 197
National Test questions 198
Functional Maths – Running a small business 200

CHAPTER 17 Algebra 5

Solving equations 202

Formulae 204
Dotty investigations 205
Graphs from the real world 207
National Test questions 210

CHAPTER 18 Geometry and measures 5

Polygons 211
Tessellations 213
Constructing 3-D shapes 215
National Test questions 217

v
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page vi

Introduction

Learning objectives
See what you are going to cover and what
you should already know at the start of
each chapter. The purple and blue boxes
set the topic in context and provide a
handy checklist.

National Curriculum levels

Know what level you are working at so
you can easily track your progress with the
colour-coded levels at the side of the page.

Worked examples
Understand the topic before you start the
exercises by reading the examples in blue
boxes. These take you through how to
answer a question step-by-step.

Functional Maths
Practise your Functional Maths skills to see
how people use Maths in everyday life.
Look out for the Functional Maths
icon on the page.

Extension activities
Stretch your thinking and investigative
skills by working through the extension
activities. By tackling these you are
working at a higher level.

vi
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page vii

Level booster
Progress to the next level by checking the
Level boosters at the end of each chapter.
These clearly show you what you need to
know at each level and how to improve.

National Test questions

Practise the past paper Test questions to
feel confident and prepared for your KS3
National Curriculum Tests. The questions
are levelled so you can check what level
you are working at.

Extra interactive National

Test practice
Watch and listen to the audio/visual
National Test questions on the separate
Interactive Book CD-ROM to help you
revise as a class on a whiteboard.
Look out for the computer mouse
icon on the page and on the screen.

Functional Maths
activities
Put Maths into context with these colourful
pages showing real-world situations
involving Maths. You are practising your
Functional Maths skills by analysing data
to solve problems.

Extra interactive
Functional Maths
questions and video clips
Extend your Functional Maths skills by
taking part in the interactive questions on
the separate Interactive Book CD-ROM.
Your teacher can put these on the
whiteboard so the class can answer the
questions on the board.
See Maths in action by watching the video
clips and doing the related Worksheets on
the Interactive Book CD-ROM. The videos
bring the Functional Maths activities to life
and help you see how Maths is used in the
real world.
Look out for the computer mouse
icon on the page and on the screen.

vii
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page viii
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page 1

CHAPTER 1 Algebra 1
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
Some simple number patterns Odd and even numbers
that you may have seen before, Times tables up to 10 × 10
and how to describe them
How to create sequences and
describe them in words
How to generate and describe
simple whole-number
sequences

Sequences and rules

You can make up many different sequences with integers (whole numbers) using simple
rules.

Example 1.1 Rule add 3 Starting at 1 gives the sequence 1, 4, 7, 10, 13, …
Starting at 2 gives the sequence 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, …
Starting at 6 gives the sequence 6, 9, 12, 15, 18, …

Rule double Starting at 1 gives the sequence 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, …

Starting at 3 gives the sequence 3, 6, 12, 24, 48, …
Starting at 5 gives the sequence 5, 10, 20, 40, 80, …

So you see, with different rules and different starting points, there are very many different
sequences you may make.
The numbers in a sequence are called terms and the starting point is called the 1st term.
The rule is often referred to as the term-to-term rule.

Exercise 1A Use each of the following term-to-term rules with the 1st terms i 1 and ii 5.
Create each sequence with 5 terms in it. 4
a add 3 b multiply by 3 c add 5 d multiply by 10
e add 9 f multiply by 5 g add 7 h multiply by 2
i add 11 j multiply by 4 k add 8 l add 105

1
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page 2

4 Give the next two terms in each of these sequences. Describe the term-to-term rule
you have used.
a 2, 4, 6, … b 3, 6, 9, … c 1, 10, 100, … d 1, 2, 4, …
e 2, 10, 50, … f 0, 7, 14, … g 7, 10, 13, … h 4, 9, 14 , …
i 4, 8, 12, … j 9, 18, 27, … k 12, 24, 36, … l 2, 6, 18 , …

Give the next two terms in these sequences. Describe the term-to-term rule you have
used.
a 50, 45, 40, 35, 30, … b 35, 32, 29, 26, 23, …
c 64, 32, 16, 8, 4, … d 3125, 625, 125, 25, 5, …
e 20, 19.3, 18.6, 17.9, 17.2, … f 1000, 100, 10, 1, 0.1, …
g 10, 7, 4, 1, –2, … h 27, 9, 3, 1, 13 , …

For each pair of numbers find at least two different sequences, writing the next two
terms. Describe the term-to-term rule you have used.
a 1, 4, … b 3, 7, … c 2, 6, …
d 3, 6, … e 4, 8, … f 5, 15, …

Find two terms between each pair of numbers to form a sequence. Describe the
term-to-term rule you have used.
a 1, …, …, 8 b 3, …, …, 12 c 5, …, …, 20
d 4, …, …, 10 e 80, …, …, 10 f 2, …, …, 54

1 Choose a target number, say 50, and try to write a term-to-term rule
which has 50 as one of its terms.
2 See how many different term-to-term rules you can find with the same
1st term that get to the target number. (Try to find at least five.)

Finding missing terms

In any sequence, you will have a 1st term, 2nd term, 3rd term, 4th term and so on.

Example 1.2 In the sequence 3, 5, 7, 9, …, what is the 5th term, and what is the 50th term?
You first need to know what the term-to-term rule is. You can see that you add 2
from one term to the next:
+2 +2 +2 +2
3 5 7 9 …
1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th …… 50th
To get to the 5th term, you add 2 to the 4th term, which gives 11.
To get to the 50th term, you will have to add on 2 a total of 49 times (50 – 1) to the
first term, 3. This will give 3 + 2 × 49 = 3 + 98 = 101.

2
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page 3

Exercise 1B In each of the following sequences, find the 5th and the 50th term.
a 4, 6, 8, 10, … b 1, 6, 11, 16, … c 3, 10, 17, 24, …
d 5, 8, 11, 14, … e 1, 5, 9, 13, … f 2, 10, 18, 26, …
g 20, 30, 40, 50, … h 10, 19, 28, 37, … i 3, 9, 15, 21, …

In each of the sequences below, find the 1st term, then find the 50th term.
In each case, you have been given the 4th, 5th and 6th terms.
a …, …, …, 13, 15, 17, … b …, …, …, 18, 23, 28, …
c …, …, …, 19, 23, 27, … d …, …, …, 32, 41, 50, …

In each of the following sequences, find the missing terms and the 50th term.

Term 1st 2nd 3rd 4th 5th 6th 7th 8th 50th
Sequence A … … … … 17 19 21 23 …
Sequence B … 9 … 19 … 29 … 39 …
Sequence C … … 16 23 … 37 44 … …
Sequence D … … 25 … 45 … … 75 …
Sequence E … 5 … 11 … … 20 … …
Sequence F … … 12 … … 18 … 22 …

Find the 40th term in the sequence with the term-to-term rule ADD 5 and a 1st term
of 6.

Find the 80th term in the sequence with the term-to-term rule ADD 4 and a 1st term
of 9.

Find the 100th term in the sequence with the term-to-term rule ADD 7 and 1st term
of 1.

Find the 30th term in the sequence with the term-to-term rule ADD 11 and 1st term
of 5.

1 You have a simple sequence where the 50th term is 349, the 51st is 354
and the 52nd is 359. Find the 1st term and the 100th term. 6
2 You are building patterns using black and yellow squares.

Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3 Pattern 4

You have 50 black squares. How many yellow squares will be in the pattern?

3
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page 4

Functions and mappings

Example 1.3 Complete the function machine to show the output.

multiply by 2 add 5
Input Output
3 …×2=6 +5 = ?

5 … × 2 = 10 +5 = ?

7 … × 2 = 14 +5 = ?

The output box can be seen to be: 11

15

19

3 a
Exercise 1C

add 3
Complete the input and output for each of the following function machines:

b subtract 2 c multiply by 5
input output input output input output
4 ? 4 ? 4 ?
5 ? 5 ? 5 ?
8 ? 8 ? 8 ?
11 ? 11 ? 11 ?

d divide by 10 e add 4 f multiply by 3

input output input output input output
100 ? 3 ? 4 ?
80 ? ? 9 ? 18
60 ? 8 ? 8 ?
50 ? ? 15 ? 36

Express each of these functions in words:

4 a b c
input output input output input output
2 4 3 9 1 6
3 5 4 12 2 12
4 6 5 15 3 18
5 7 6 18 4 24

d e f
input output input output input output
24 12 2 9 2 16
12 6 3 10 4 32
8 4 4 11 6 48
6 3 5 12 8 64

4
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:55 Page 5

Fill in the missing values in the following double function machines.

a
4
×…
8
+…
11 4
5 15 9
b ×… –…

4 6 18
c +… ×…

3 … 18
d +… ×2

Each of the following functions is made up from two operations, as above.

Find the combined functions in each case.
6
a b c
1 3 1 2 1 7
2 5 2 5 2 12
3 7 3 8 3 17
4 9 4 11 4 22

1 Work backwards from each output to find the input to each of the
following functions:

a ?, ?, ?, ? ×3 +4 7, 13, 16, 25

b ?, ?, ?, ? +5 ×2 14, 16, 20, 26

c ?, ?, ?, ? ×4 –3 9, 17, 33, 37

2 From the following single functions, see how many different combined
functions you can make.

×3 +4 –1 ×2 +5

Using letter symbols to represent

functions
Here is some algebra shorthand that is useful to know:
2x means two multiplied by x
2g means two multiplied by g
5h means five multiplied by h
The idea of algebra is that we use a letter to represent a situation where we don’t know a
number (value) or where we know the value can vary (be lots of different numbers).

5
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 6

Each of these is an expression. An expression is often a mixture of letters, numbers and

signs. We call the letters variables, because the values they stand for vary.
For example, 3x , x + 5 , 2x + 7 are expressions, and x is a variable in each case.
When the variable in an expression is a particular number, the expression has a particular
value.
For example, in the expression x + 6 , when x = 4, the expression has the value 4 + 6,
which is 10.

Example 1.4 Given that n = 5, write down the value of the following expressions:
a n+6 b 4n c n–2
In each case, substitute (replace) the letter n with the number 5.
a n + 6 = 5 + 6 = 11
b 4n = 4 × 5 = 20
c n–2=5–2=3

Example 1.5 Draw mapping diagrams to illustrate each of the following functions:
a x→x+5 b x → 3x c x → 2x + 1
x x+5
a +5
x 3x
b ×3
x 2x 2x + 1
c ×2 +1

3 Exercise 1D Write down what the expression n + 5 is equal to when:

i n=3 ii n=7 iii n = 10 iv n=2 v n = 21

Write down what the expression 3n is equal to when:

i n=4 ii n=8 iii n = 11 iv n=5 v n = 22

Write down what the expression x–1 is equal to when:

i x=8 ii x = 19 iii x = 100 iv x=3 v x = 87

Write each of the following rules in symbolic form (for example, x → x + 4).
4 a add 3 b multiply by 5 c subtract 2 d divide by 5

Draw mapping diagrams to illustrate each of the following functions.

a x→x+2 b x → 4x c x→x+5 d x→x–3

6
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 7

Express each of the following functions in symbolic form as in Question 4.

a 2→ 9 b 2 → 10 c 2→1 d 2 → 8

3 → 10 3 → 15 3→2 3 → 12

4 → 11 4 → 20 4→3 4 → 16

5 → 12 5 → 25 5→4 5 → 20

e 12 → 4 f 2 → 7 g 2 → 20 h 12 → 9

15 → 5 3 → 8 3 → 30 13 → 10

21 → 7 4 → 9 4 → 40 14 → 11

30 → 10 5 → 10 5 → 50 15 → 12

Draw mapping diagrams to illustrate each of these functions.

a x → 2x + 3 b x → 3x – 2 c x → 5x + 1 d x → 10x – 3 6
Describe each of the following mappings as functions in symbolic form, as above.
a 1→1 b 1→ 7 c 1 → 1 d 1 → 11

2→3 2 → 11 2 → 4 2 → 21

3→5 3 → 15 3 → 7 3 → 31

4→7 4 → 19 4 → 10 4 → 41

Put the same number through each of these function machines:

input output
÷2 –3

input output
–2 ÷3

Repeat with other numbers.

Can you find an input that gives the same output for both function machines?

7
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 8

The general term (nth term)

We can describe sequences by giving a rule for any term. This is called the nth term and is
an algebraic expression.

Example 1.6 The nth term of the sequence 7, 11, 15, 19, 23, … is given by the expression 4n + 3.
a Show this is true for the first three terms.
b Use the rule to find the 50th term of the sequence.

a Let n = 1: 4×1+3=4+3=7
Let n = 2: 4 × 2 + 3 = 8 + 3 = 11
Let n = 3: 4 × 3 + 3 = 12 + 3 = 15
b Let n = 50: 4 × 50 + 3 = 200 + 3 = 203
So, the 50th term is 203.

Example 1.7 The nth term of a sequence is given by 3n – 1.

a Find the first three terms of the sequence.
b Find the 60th term of the sequence.

a Let n = 1: 3×1–1=3–1=2
Let n = 2: 3×2–1=6–1=5
Let n = 3: 3×3–1=9–1=8
So, the first three terms are 2, 5, 8, ….
b Let n = 60: 3 × 60 – 1 = 180 – 1 = 179
So, the 60th term is 179.

6 Exercise 1E Find i the first three terms and

given by:
ii the 100th term, of sequences whose nth term is

a 2n + 1 b 4n – 1 c 5n – 3
d 3n + 2 e 4n + 5 f 10n + 1
1 1 1
g 2n +2 h 7n – 1 i 2n – 4

Find i the first three terms and ii the 100th term, of sequences whose nth
term is given by:
1
a n2 b (n + 2)(n + 1) c 2 n(n + 1)

8
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 9

An nth term investigation

Here is a list of three sequences and their nth term.

4, 9, 14, 19, 24, … 5n – 1
2, 6, 10, 14, 18, … 4n – 2
8, 11, 14, 17, 20, … 3n + 5
Make up at least three more nth terms of the form an ± b, for example 2n + 5,
and work out the first five terms.
Copy and complete the table below using the three sequences above and the
ones you made up.

Sequence nth term

Sequence Difference First term Coefficient Constant term

between terms of n
4, 9, 14, 19, 24 5 4 5 –1
2, 6, 10, 14, 18 4 2 4 –2
8, 11, 14, 17, 20

1 What is the connection between the difference between the terms and
the coefficient of n?
2 What is the connection between the difference between the terms, the
first term and the constant term?
3 Without working out the terms of the sequences, match these sequences
to the nth term expressions.
Sequence nth term
a 3, 9, 15, 21, 27, … 6n + 1
b 10, 13, 16, 19, 22, … 3n – 1
c 7, 13, 19, 25, 31, … 3n + 7
d 2, 5, 8, 11, 14, … 6n – 3
4 Can you write down the nth terms of these sequences?
a 4, 11, 18, 25, 32, …
b 5, 7, 9, 11, 13, …
c 9, 13, 17, 21, 25, …
d 5, 13, 21, 29, 37, …
e 11, 21, 31, 41, 51, …

9
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 10

3 I can work out the value of expressions like 3a – 4b for values of a and b such as a = 5 and b = 3,
i.e. 3.
I can find the output value for a function machine like the one below when I know the input value.
×3

4 I can write down a sequence given the first term, say 3, and a term-to-term rule such as ‘goes up
by 4 each time’, i.e. 3, 7, 11, 15, 19, …
I can give the term-to-term rule for a sequence such as 4, 7, 10, 13, 16, …, i.e. ‘goes up by 3 each time’.
I can write an algebraic expression for a rule such as ‘add 3’, i.e. x + 3.
I can find the operation in a function machine like the one below when you are given the inputs
and outputs, i.e. × 4.
1 4
2 8
3 12

5 I can find any term in a sequence given the first term, say 5, and the term-to-term rule such as
‘goes up by 6 each time’, i.e. the 20th term is 119.
I can write a double operation rule using algebra, i.e. –2x – 3 for the function machine below.

x ÷2 –3

6
I can find the operations in a double operation function machine like the one below given the
inputs and outputs, i.e. + 3 and × 2.
1 4 8
2 5 10
3 6 12
I can find any term in a sequence given the algebraic rule for the nth term,
i.e. a sequence with an nth term of 6n – 5 has a 10th term of 55.

1 2004 4–6 Paper 2

4 Here is a sequence of shapes made with grey and white tiles.

Shape Shape Shape Shape
Number 1 Number 2 Number 3 Number 4

The number of grey tiles = 2 × the shape number

The number of white tiles = 2 × the shape number

10
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 11

a Altogether, how many tiles will there be in shape number 5?

b Altogether, how many tiles will there be in shape number 15? 4

c Write down the missing number from the following sentence:
The total number of tiles = × the shape number.

2 2000 Paper 2

a Write down the next two numbers in the sequence below:

281, 287, 293, 299, …, …

b Write down the next two numbers in the sequence below:

1, 4, 9, 16, 25, …, …

c Describe the pattern in part b in your own words.

3 2000 Paper 2

You can make ‘huts’ with matches.

1 hut needs 2 huts need 3 huts need

5 matches 9 matches 13 matches

A rule to find how many matches you need is:

m = 4h + 1
m stands for the number of matches
h stands for the number of huts
a Use the rule to find how many matches you need to make 8 huts.
(Show your working.)

b I use 81 matches to make some huts. How many huts do I make?

(Show your working.)

11
FM Ch 8 School Chef PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:50 Page 104

Functional Maths

Be a school chef for a day

Your class has been asked to transform the school canteen with the help of a professional chef.
1 In order to develop your menu with him, you need to collect certain data before presenting your
findings and trialling recipes. The tally chart below shows pupils’ choices for food.

Key Stage 3 Frequency Key Stage 4 Frequency

Pasta llll Pasta llll llll lll
Salad ll Salad llll
Pizza llll llll l Pizza llll l
Jacket potato llll Jacket potato llll llll
Curry llll llll Curry llll llll llll
Toasties llll l Toasties llll llll l

a Explain the differences between the two

key stages.
b Combine the two tallies into one and create
the single bar chart to illustrate the
whole-school choices.

You now have to work out how your menu will be priced
2 with the chef. In order to do this you need to know how
much pupils will be prepared to pay for lunch each day.

Price under £1 £1– £2 over £2

Y7 30 45 12
Y8 25 50 18
Y9 18 42 25
Y10 11 52 27
Y11 8 55 22

a Explain the differences between the year groups.

b Combine the table into one and create the single bar chart
to illustrate the whole school price choices.`

104
FM Ch 8 School Chef PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:50 Page 105

The table below shows the ingredients needed for the chef to create enough
3 of the particular dish for 50 pupils.

Ingredients Tomato & Spicy Mexican Chilli jacket

Pitta pizza
needed chicken pasta wraps potatoes

Chopped
20 0 5 0
tomatoes (tins)

Mushrooms
5 0 2 2
(punnets)

Peppers (×3) 5 10 2 8

Onions (×5) 6 5 5 3

Potatoes
0 0 3 0
(5 kg bags)

Chef wanted to create the following dishes on one day:

Tomato & chicken pasta for 150 pupils
Spicy Mexican wraps for 25 pupils
Chilli jacket potatoes for 75 pupils
Pitta pizza for 350 pupils

Write down the total number required of:

a Tins of chopped tomatoes
b Punnets of mushrooms
c Peppers
d Onions
e 5 kg bags of potatoes

105
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 106

CHAPTER 9 Number and Measures 3

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to round off positive whole Tables up to 10 times 10
numbers and decimals Place value of the digits in a
The order of operations number such as 23.508
How to multiply and divide a
three-digit whole number by a
two-digit whole number without
a calculator
How to use a calculator
efficiently

Rounding
What is wrong with this picture?
It shows that the woman’s
weight (60 kg) balances the
man’s weight (110 kg) when
both weights are rounded to
the nearest 100 kg!
This example highlights the
need to round numbers
sensibly, depending on the
situation in which they occur.

But, we do not always need numbers to be precise, and it is easier to work with numbers
that are rounded off.

Example 9.1 Round off each of these numbers to i the nearest 10 ii the nearest 100 iii the
nearest 1000.
a 937 b 2363 c 3799 d 281
a 937 is 940 to the nearest 10, 900 to the nearest 100 and 1000 to the nearest
1000.
b 2363 is 2360 to the nearest 10, 2400 to the nearest 100, and 2000 to the
nearest 1000.
c 3799 is 3800 to the nearest 10, 3800 to the nearest 100, and 4000 to the
nearest 1000.
d 281 is 280 to the nearest 10, 300 to the nearest 100, and 0 to the nearest 1000.

106
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 107

Example 9.2 Round off each of these numbers to i the nearest whole number ii one decimal
place (dp).
a 9.35 b 4.323 c 5.99
a 9.35 is 9 to the nearest whole number and 9.4 to 1 dp.
b 4.323 is 4 to the nearest whole number and 4.3 to 1 dp.
c 5.99 is 6 to the nearest whole number and 6.0 to 1 dp.

Exercise 9A Round off each of these numbers to i the nearest 10 ii the nearest 100 iii the nearest
1000.
a 3731 b 807 c 2111 d 4086 e 265 f 3457
3
g 4050 h 2999 i 1039 j 192 k 3192 l 964

i What is the mass being weighed by each scale to the nearest 100 g?
ii Estimate the mass being weighed to the nearest 10 g.
a b c d

300 300 300 300

200 400 200 400 200 400 200 400
100 500 100 500 100 500 100 500

0 600 0 600 0 600 0 600

grams grams grams grams

i What is the volume of the liquid in each measuring cylinder to the nearest 10 ml?
ii Estimate the volume of liquid to the nearest whole number.
a b c d

100 100 100 100

90 90 90 90
80 80 80 80
70 70 70 70
60 60 60 60
50 50 50 50
40 40 40 40
30 30 30 30
20 20 20 20
10 10 10 10
ml ml ml ml

Round off each of these numbers to i the nearest whole number ii one decimal place.
a 4.72
g 3.92
b 3.07
h 2.64
c 2.634
i 3.18
d 1.932
j 3.475
e 0.78
k 1.45
f 0.92
l 1.863
4

107
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 108

How long are each of these ropes to i the nearest 100 cm ii the nearest 10 cm
4 iii the nearest cm iv the nearest mm?
a b

176 177 178 179 cm 62 63 64 65 66 cm

c d

278 279 280 281 282 cm 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.8 m

a The following are the diameters of the planets in kilometres. Round off each one
to the nearest 1000 km. Then place the planets in order of size, starting with the
smallest.

Planet Earth Jupiter Mars Mercury Neptune Pluto Saturn Uranus Venus
Diameter (km) 12 800 142 800 6780 5120 49 500 2284 120 660 51 100 12 100

b What would happen if you rounded off the diameters to the nearest 10 000 km?

The headteacher says: ‘All of our classes have about 30 pupils in them.’
Given this number is to the nearest 10, what is the smallest class there could
be and what would be the largest?
The deputy head says: ‘All of the cars driving past the school are doing about
30 mph.’ Given this number is to the nearest 10, what is the lowest speed the
cars could be doing and what would be the highest?
Why are these answers different?
Write down the smallest and largest values for each of the following.
a A crowd of people estimated at 80 to the nearest 10 people.
b The speed of a car estimated at 80 mph to the nearest 10 mph.
c The length of a leaf estimated at 8 cm to the nearest centimetre.
d The number of marbles in a bag estimated at 50 to the nearest
10 marbles.
e The number of marbles in a bag estimated at 50 to the nearest marble.
f The weight of some marbles in a bag estimated at 500 grams to the
nearest 10 grams.

108
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 109

The four operations

Below are four calculations. Make up problems using the pictures that go with the four
calculations.

38.65
ltr

OL
PETR

70.9 × 8 = 567.2 250 – 198 = 52 2.3 + 3.5 + 1.7 = 7.5 435 ÷ 15 = 29

Example 9.3 a Find the product of 9 and 56. b Find the remainder when 345 is divided by 51.
a Product means ‘multiply’. So, 9 × 56 = 9 × 50 + 9 × 6 = 450 + 54 = 504.
b 345 ÷ 51 ≈ 350 ÷ 50 = 7. So, 7 × 51 = 350 + 7 = 357 which is too big.
6 × 51 = 306, which gives 345 – 306 = 39. The remainder is 39.

Example 9.4 A box of biscuits costs £1.99. How much will 28 boxes cost?
The easiest way to do this is: 28 × £2 minus 28p = £56 – 28p = £55.72.

Example 9.5 Mr Smith travels from Edinburgh (E) to Liverpool (L) and then to Bristol (B). Mr Jones
travels directly from Edinburgh to Bristol. Use the distance chart to find out how
much further Mr Smith travelled than Mr Jones.
E L B
Mr Smith travels 226 + 237 = 463 miles. Mr Jones travels 383 miles. E 226 383
463 – 383 = 80 L 226 237
So, Mr Smith travels 80 miles further. B 383 237

Exercise 9B

How long does a train journey take if the train leaves at 10:32 am and arrives at
1:12 pm? 3
Which mark is better: 17 out of 20 or 40 out of 50?

How much does it cost to fill a 51-litre petrol tank at 80p per litre?
4
a A company has 197 boxes to move by van. The van can carry 23 boxes at a
time. How many trips must the van make to move all the boxes?
b The same van does 34 miles to the gallon of petrol. Each trip above is 31 miles.
Can the van deliver all the boxes if it has 8 gallons of petrol in the tank?

Find the sum and product of a 5, 7 and 20. b 2, 38 and 50.

109
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 110

4 The local video shop is having a sale. Videos are £4.99 each or five for £20.
a What is the cost of three videos?
b What is the cost of ten videos?
c What is the greatest number of videos you can buy with £37?

a Three consecutive integers have a sum of 90. What are they?

b Two consecutive integers have a product of 132. What are they?
c Explain why there is more than one answer to this problem:
Two consecutive integers have a difference of 1. What are they?

Rajid has between 50 and 60 books. He arranged them in piles of four and found
that he had one pile of three left over. He then arranged them in piles of five and
found that he had one pile of four left over. How many books does Rajid have?

The magic number of this magic square is 50.

5 18 11 16
That means that the numbers in every row, in every column
and in both diagonals add up to 50. 12 15 6 17

However, there are many more ways to make 50 by adding 14 9 20 7

four numbers. For example, each of the following sets of 19 8 13 10
4 numbers makes 50.

5 18 5 16 18 11
12 15
19 10 8 13

How many more arrangements of four numbers can you find that add up to 50?

BODMAS
The following are instructions for making a cup of tea.
Can you put them in the right order?

Drink tea Empty teapot Fill kettle Put milk in cup Put teabag in teapot

Rinse teapot with Pour boiling water

Switch on kettle Wait for tea to brew Pour out tea
hot water in teapot

It is important that things are done in the right order. In mathematical operations there are
rules about this.
The order of operations is called BODMAS, which stands for B (Brackets), O (Order or
POwer), D M (Division and Multiplication) and A S (Addition and Subtraction).
Operations are always done in this order, which means that brackets are done first,
followed by powers, then multiplication and division, and finally addition and subtraction.

110
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 111

Example 9.6 Circle the operation that you do first in each of these calculations. Then work out
each one.
a 2+6÷2 b 32 – 4 × 5 c 6÷3–1 d 6 ÷ (3 – 1)
a Division is done before addition, so you get 2 + 6 ÷ 2 = 2 + 3 = 5
b Multiplication is done before subtraction, so you get 32 – 4 × 5 = 32 – 20 = 12
c Division is done before subtraction, so you get 6 ÷ 3 – 1 = 2 – 1 = 1
d Brackets are done first, so you get 6 ÷ (3 – 1) = 6 ÷ 2 = 3

Example 9.7 Work out each of the following, showing each step of the calculation.
a 1 + 32 × 4 – 2 b (1 + 3) 2 × (4 – 2)
a The order will be power, multiplication, addition, subtraction (the last two can
be interchanged). This gives:
1 + 32 × 4 – 2 = 1 + 9 × 4 – 2 = 1 + 36 – 2 = 37 – 2 = 35
b The order will be brackets (both of them), power, multiplication. This gives:
(1 + 3)2 × (4 – 2) = 42 × 2 = 16 × 2 = 32

Example 9.8 Put brackets into each of the following to make the calculation true.
a 5 + 1 × 4 = 24 b 1 + 32 – 4 = 12 c 24 ÷ 6 – 2 = 6
Decide which operation is done first.
a (5 + 1) × 4 = 24
b (1 + 3)2 – 4 = 12
c 24 ÷ (6 – 2) = 6

Exercise 9C Write down the operation that you do first in each of these calculations. Then work
out each one.
a 2+3×6 b 12 – 6 ÷ 3 c 5×5+2 d 12 ÷ 4 – 2
e (2 + 3) × 6 f (12 – 3) ÷ 3 g 5 × (5 + 2) h 12 ÷ (4 – 2)

Work out the following showing each step of the calculation.

a 2×3+4 b 2 × (3 + 4) c 2+3×4 d (2 + 3) × 4
e 4×4–4 f 5 + 32 + 6 g 5 × (32 + 6) h 32 – (5 – 2)
i (2 + 3) × (4 + 5) j (22 + 3) × (4 + 5) k 4÷4+4÷4
l 44 ÷ 4 + 4 m (6 + 2)2 n 62 + 22 o 32 + 4 × 6

Put brackets into each of the following to make the calculation true.
a 2 × 5 + 4 = 18 b 2 + 6 × 3 = 24 c 2 + 3 × 1 + 6 = 35
d 5 + 22 × 1 = 9 e 3 + 22 = 25 f 3 × 4 + 3 + 7 = 28
g 3 + 4 × 7 + 1 = 35 h 3 + 4 × 7 + 1 = 50 i 9–5–2=6
j 9–5×2=8 k 4+4+4÷2=6 l 1 + 42 – 9 – 2 = 18

111
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 112

One of the calculations 2 × 32 = 36 and 2 × 32 = 18 is wrong. Which is it and how

could you add brackets to make it true?

Work out the value of each of these.

a (4 + 4) ÷ (4 + 4) b (4 × 4) ÷ (4 + 4) c (4 + 4 + 4) ÷ 4
d 4 × (4 – 4) + 4 e (4 × 4 + 4) ÷ 4 f (4 + 4 + 4) ÷ 2
g 4+4–4÷4 h (4 + 4) × (4 ÷ 4) i (4 + 4) + 4 ÷ 4

In Question 5, each calculation was made up of four 4s.

Work out the value of: a 44 ÷ 4 – 4 b 4×4–4÷4 c 4×4+4–4
Can you make other calculations using four 4s to give answers that you have
not yet obtained in Question 5 or in the three calculations above?
Do as many as you can and see whether you can make all the values up to 20.
Repeat with five 5s. For example:
(5 + 5) ÷ 5 – 5 ÷ 5 = 1 (5 × 5 – 5) ÷ (5 + 5) = 2

Long multiplication and long division

Example 9.9 Work out 36 × 43.

Below are four examples of the ways this calculation can be done. The answer is
1548.
Box method Column method Column method Chinese method
(partitioning)
(expanded working) (compacted working)
36 36 3 6
× 30 6 × ———
43 × ——— 43
1 2
40 1200 240 1440 18 (3 × 6) 108 (3 × 36) 1 4
90 (3 × 30)
1
11 42 40 (40 × 36) 2 4
3 90 18 108 ——— 0 1
240 (40 × 6) 1548 5 1 3
1548 1200 (40 × 30) 9 8
———
1548
——— 4 8

Example 9.10 Work out 543 ÷ 31.

Below are two examples of the ways this can be done. The answer is 17, remainder 16.
Subtracting multiples Traditional method
543 ——17
310 (10 × 31)
– —— 31 / 543
233 31
—
155 (5 × 31)
– —— 233
78 217
——
— (2 × 31)
– 62 16
16

112
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 113

Exercise 9D Work out each of the following long multiplication problems. Use any method you
are happy with.
a 17 × 23 b 32 × 42 c 19 × 45 d 56 × 46
e 12 × 346 f 32 × 541 g 27 × 147 h 39 × 213

Work out each of the following long division problems. Use any method you are
happy with. Some of the problems will have a remainder.
a 684 ÷ 19 b 966 ÷ 23 c 972 ÷ 36 d 625 ÷ 25
e 930 ÷ 38 f 642 ÷ 24 g 950 ÷ 33 h 800 ÷ 42

Decide whether the following nine problems involve long multiplication or long
division. Then do the appropriate calculation, showing your method clearly.

Each day 17 Jumbo jets fly from London to San Francisco. Each jet can carry up to
348 passengers. How many people can travel from London to San Francisco each
day?

A company has 897 boxes to move by van. The van can carry 23 boxes at a time.
How many trips must the van make to move all the boxes?

The same van does 34 miles to a gallon of petrol. How many miles can it do if the
petrol tank holds 18 gallons?

The school photocopier can print 82 sheets a minute. If it runs without stopping for
45 minutes, how many sheets will it print?

The RE department has printed 525 sheets on Buddhism. These are put into folders in
sets of 35. How many folders are there?

a To raise money, Wath Running Club are going to do a relay race from Wath to
Edinburgh, which is 384 kilometres. Each runner will run 24 kilometres. How
many runners will be needed to cover the distance?
b Sponsorship will bring in £32 per kilometre. How much money will the club raise?

Computer floppy disks are 45p each. How much will a box of 35 disks cost? Give
your answer in pounds.

The daily newspaper sells advertising by the square inch. On Monday, it sells 232
square inches at £15 per square inch. How much money does it get from this
advertising?

The local library has 13 000 books. Each shelf holds 52 books. How many shelves
are there?

113
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 114

Another way of multiplying two two-digit numbers together is the ‘Funny

Face’ method.
This shows how to do 26 × 57.
26 × 57 = (20 + 6) × (50 + 7)

(20 + 6) × (50 + 7) 1000 (20 × 50)

140 (20 × 7)
300 (6 × 50)
+ ——
42 (6 × 7)
1482
Do a poster showing a calculation using the ‘Funny Face’ method.

Efficient calculations
You should have your own calculator, so that you can get used to it. Make sure that you
understand how to use the basic functions (×, ÷, +, –) and the square, square root and
brackets keys. They are different even on scientific calculators.

Example 9.11 Use a calculator to work out a 242 + 118

––––––––– b 63 × 224
––––––––
88 – 72 32 × 36
The line that separates the top numbers from the bottom numbers acts both as a
divide sign (÷) and as brackets.
a Key the calculation as (242 + 118) ÷ (88 – 72) = 22.5
b Key the calculation as (63 × 224) ÷ (32 × 36) = 12.25

Example 9.12 Use a calculator to work out a √1764 b 23.42 c 52.3 – (30.4 – 17.3)
a Some calculators need the square root after the number has been keyed, some
need it before: √1764 = 42
b Most calculators have a special key for squaring: 23.4 2 = 547.56
c This can be keyed in exactly as it reads: 52.3 – (30.4 – 17.3) = 39.2

Exercise 9E Without using a calculator, work out the value of each of these.
a 17 + 8
–––––– b 53 – 8
––––––– c 19.2 – 1.7
–––––––––
7–2 3.5 – 2 5.6 – 3.1

Use a calculator to do the calculations in Question 1. Do you get the same answers?
For each part, write down the sequence of keys that you pressed to get the answer.

114
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 115

Work out the value of each of these. Round off your answers to 1 dp.
a 194 + 866
–––––––––– b 213 + 73
––––––––– c 132 + 88
–––––––– d –––––––––
792 + 88
122 + 90 63 – 19 78 – 28 54 – 21
e 790 × 84
––––––––– f 642 × 24
–––––––– g 107 + 853
––––––––– h ––––––––
57 – 23
24 × 28 87 – 15 24 × 16 18 – 7.8

Estimate the answer to: 231 + 167

–––––––––
78 – 32
Now use a calculator to work out the answer to 1 dp. Is it about the same?

Work out:
a √42.25 b √68.89 c 2.62 d 3.92
e √(23.8 + 66.45) f √(7 – 5.04) g (5.2 – 1.8)2 h (2.5 + 6.1)2

Work out:
a 8.3 – (4.2 – 1.9) b 12.3 + (3.2 – 1.7) 2 c (3.2 + 1.9) 2 – (5.2 – 2.1)2

Use a calculator to find the quotient and the remainder when:

a 985 is divided by 23 b 802 is divided by 36

A calculator shows an answer of:

2.33333333333
Write this as a mixed number or a top heavy fraction.

Time calculations are difficult to do on a calculator as there are not 100 minutes
in an hour. So, you need to know either the decimal equivalents of all the
divisions of an hour or the way to work them out. For example: 15 minutes is
0.25 of an hour.
Copy and complete this table for some of the decimal equivalents to fractions of
an hour.

Time (min) 5 6 12 15 20 30 40 45 54 55
1 1 1 1 9
Fraction –
12
–
10
–
4
–
3
–
10

Decimal 0.166 0.2 0.25 0.667 0.917

When a time is given as a decimal and it is not one of those in the table
above, you need a way to work it out in hours and minutes. For example:
3.4578 hours: subtract 3 to give 0.4578, then multiply by 60 to give 27.468
This is 27 minutes to the nearest minute. So, 3.4578 ≈ 3 hours 27 minutes.
1 Find each of the following decimal times as a time in hours and minutes.
a 2.5 h b 3.25 h c 4.75 h d 3.1 h
e 4.6 h f 3.3333 h g 1.15 h h 4.3 h
i 0.45 h j 0.95 h k 3.666 h
2 Find each of the following times in hours and minutes as a decimal time.
a 2 h 40 min b 1 h 45 min c 2 h 18 min d 1 h 20 min

115
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 116

Calculating with measurements

The following table shows the relationship between the common metric units.

1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001

km m cm mm
kg g mg
l cl ml

Example 9.13 Add together 1.23 m, 46 cm and 0.034 km.

First convert all the lengths to the same unit.

1000 100 10 1 0.1 0.01 0.001

km m cm mm
1 2 3
4 6
0 0 3 4

The answer is 0.035 69 km or 35.69 m or 3569 cm. 35.69 m is the sensible answer.

Example 9.14 A recipe needs 550 grams of flour to make a cake. How many 1 kg bags of flour will
be needed to make six cakes?
Six cakes will need 6 × 550 = 3300 g, which will need four bags of flour.

Example 9.15 What unit would you use to measure each of these?
a Width of a football field
b Length of a pencil
c Weight of a car
d Spoonful of medicine
Choose a sensible unit. Sometimes there is more than one answer.
a Metre b Centimetre c Kilogram d Millilitre

Example 9.16 Convert a 6 cm to mm b 1250 g to kg c 5 l to cl

You need to know the conversion factors.
a 1 cm = 10 mm: 6 × 10 = 60 mm
b 1000 g = 1 kg: 1250 ÷ 1000 = 1.25 kg
c 1 l = 100 cl: 5 l = 5 × 100 = 500 cl

116
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 117

Exercise 9F Convert each of the following lengths to centimetres.

a 60 mm b 2m c 743 mm d 0.007 km e 12.35 m

Convert each of the following lengths to kilometres.

a 456 m b 7645 m c 6532 cm d 21 358 mm e 54 m

Convert each of the following lengths to millimetres.

a 34 cm b 3m c 3 km d 35.6 cm e 0.7 cm

Convert each of the following masses to kilograms.

a 3459 g b 215 g c 65 120 g d 21 g e 210 g

Convert each of the following masses to grams.

a 4 kg b 4.32 kg c 0.56 kg d 0.007 kg e 6.784 kg

Convert each of the following capacities to litres.

a 237 cl b 3097 ml c 1862 cl d 48 cl e 96 427 ml

Convert each of the following times to hours and minutes.

a 70 min b 125 min c 87 min d 200 min e 90 min

Add together each of the following groups of measurements and give the answer in
an appropriate unit.
a 1.78 m, 39 cm, 0.006 km b 0.234 kg, 60 g, 0.004 kg
c 2.3 l, 46 cl, 726 ml d 0.000 6 km, 23 mm, 3.5 cm

Fill in each missing unit.

a A two-storey house is about 7…… high b John weighs about 47……
c Mary lives about 2…… from school d Ravid ran a marathon in 3……

Read the value from each of the following scales.

a b 100 c

300
200 400
200
100 500
grams
2 kg 3 kg 0 600
grams

d e f
0 50 200 100 0 20

117
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 118

6 Area is measured in square millimetres (mm2), square centimetres (cm2),

square metres (m2) and square kilometres (km2). 10 mm
This square shows 1 square centimetre reproduced exactly.
10 mm
You can fit 100 square millimetres inside this square because a
1 centimetre square is 10 mm by 10 mm.
How many square centimetres are there in 1 square metre?
How many square metres are there in 1 square kilometre?
1 What unit would you use to measure the area of each of these?
a Football field b Photograph c Fingernail
d National park e Pacific Ocean f Stamp
2 Convert a 24 cm2 to mm2 b 6 km2 to m2
c 4000 mm2 to cm2 d 3 456 000 m2 to km2
3 Look up the areas of some countries on the Internet or in an encyclopaedia.
a Which are the three biggest countries (in terms of area) in the world?
b Which is the biggest country (in terms of area) in Europe?

Solving problems
MATHEMATICAL Mrs Farmer is frightened of mice. One day, she finds three mice in her kitchen.
MICE A large one, a medium-sized one and a small one.
She tries to scare them out but they are Mathematical Mice who will only leave when a
dice is rolled.
When the dice shows 1 or 2, the small mouse goes through the door.
When the dice shows 3 or 4, the medium-sized mouse goes through the door.
When the dice shows 5 or 6, the big mouse goes through the door.
For example: Mrs Farmer rolls the dice. She gets 3, so the medium-sized mouse goes
through the door. Next, she rolls 5, so the big mouse goes through the
door. Next, she rolls 4, so the medium-sized mouse comes back through
the door. Then she rolls 2, so the small mouse leaves. Finally, she rolls 4,
so the medium-sized mouse leaves and all three are out of the kitchen.
Can you find a rule for the number of throws that it takes to get out all the mice?
What if there were two mice, or six mice?
Before you start, you should think about how you are going to record your results.
You should make sure that you explain in writing what you are going to do.
If you come up with an idea, you should write it down and explain it or test it.

118
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 119

3 I can remember simple multiplication and division facts.

4 I can read numbers on a range of measuring instruments.

I can round whole numbers to the nearest 10, 100 or 1000.
I know the names and abbreviations of units in everyday use.

5 I can convert between metric units.

I can multiply and divide whole numbers and decimals.
I can round numbers to one decimal place.
I can use brackets appropriately.
I can estimate answers to questions.

1 2006 4–6 paper 1

Work out the missing numbers.
In each part, you can use the first line to help you.
4
a 16 × 15 = 240
16 × = 480

b 46 × 44 = 2024
46 × 22 =

c 600 ÷ 24 = 25
600 ÷ = 50

2 2001 Paper 1

a Write the answers to (4 + 2) × 3 = ……, 4 + (2 × 3) = ……

b Work out the answer to (2 + 4) × (6 + 3 + 1) = ……

c Copy and put brackets in the calculation to make the answer 50.
4 + 5 + 1 × 5 = 50

d Now copy and put brackets in the calculation to make the answer 34.
4 + 5 + 1 × 5 = 34

119
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 120

3 2006 4–6 Paper 2

Write down the numbers missing from the boxes.

a 4× + 20 = 180 b 4 × 20 + = 180 c 4× – 20 = 180

4 2004 4–6 Paper 1

Steve needs to put 1 litre of water in a bucket.
He has a 500 ml jug.
Explain how he can measure 1 litre of water.
500 ml

5 2005 4–6 Paper 1

a I weigh a melon.

0 200 400 600 800 1000 200 400 600 800 2000
grams

200 400 600 800 200 400 600 800

0 1000 2000
grams

Then I weigh an apple and the melon.

0 200 400 600 800 1000 200 400 600 800 2000
grams

200 400 600 800 200 400 600 800

0 1000 2000
grams

Complete the sentences below, writing in the missing numbers:

The melon weighs ... grams.
The apple weighs ... grams.

b How many grams are in one kilogram?

Which one of the following numbers is correct?
1 10 100 1000 10 000

120
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:24 Page 121

6 2000 Paper 2

a A club wants to take 3000 people on a journey to London using coaches. Each coach can carry 52
people. How many coaches do they need?

b Each coach costs £420. What is the total cost of the coaches?

c How much is each person’s share of the cost?

121
FM Ch 1 Valencia PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:40 Page 12

Functional Maths

Valencia Planetarium

Use this key

to answer the
following
questions.

Ladders and grids are made from

combinations of:

‘L’ links ‘T’ links ‘X’ links ‘R’ rods 1 Look at the ladders on the right.
Each combination can be expressed a Write down algebraic
expressions for each i
algebraically.
of them. ii
For example
b Copy and fill in this table. iii
Ladder L links T links R Rods
1 4 0 4
2 4 2 7
3
4L + 2T + 7R4 L + 6T + 2X + 17R 4
5

c Write down an algebraic expression for the links and

rods in ladder 10.

2 Look at the following rectangles that are 2 squares deep.

i ii iii

a Write down algebraic expressions for each of them.

b Copy and complete the following table.
Rectangle L links T links X links R Rods
2×1 4 2 0 7
2×2 4 4 1 12
2×3

c Write down an algebraic expression for the links and

rods in a 2 × 10 rectangle.

12
FM Ch 1 Valencia PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:40 Page 13

3 Look at the following rectangles that are 3 squares deep.

i ii iii

a Write down algebraic expressions for each of them.

b Copy and complete the following table.
Rectangle L links T links X links R Rods
3×1 4 4 0 10
3×2 4 6 2 17
3×3
3×4
3×5

c Write down an algebraic expression for the links and

rods in an 3 × 10 rectangle.

4 Using the algebraic expressions for a 2 × 10 and a 3 × 10

rectangle in panels 4 and 5, write down an algebraic
expression for the number of links and rods in a 4 × 10
rectangle.

5 Look at the following squares.

i ii iii

a Write down algebraic expressions for each of them.

b Copy and complete the following table.
Square L links T links X links R Rods
1×1 4 0 0 4
2×2 4 4 1 12
3×3

c Continue the table to find the number of links and

rods in a 7 × 7 square.
d Describe how the pattern of T links is building up.
e What type of special numbers are the numbers of
X links?
f Describe how the pattern of R rods is building up.
g Write down an algebraic expression for the number of
links and rods in an 8 × 8 square.

13
FM Ch 9 Carbon footprint PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:53 Page 122

Functional Maths

What’s your carbon footprint?

Every day we use energy. Scientists

can work out our carbon footprint
by calculating how much energy
we use each year.

Fascinating facts
Our homes use 30% of the total energy used
in the UK.
The average yearly carbon dioxide
emissions in the UK are 9.4 tonnes per
person.
A rule for working out the average yearly
carbon dioxide emissions of people in the
USA is to double the UK figure and add 1.
This gives 2 × 9.4 + 1 = 19.8 tonnes per
person.
If we turn down the thermostat by one
degree we would save 300 kg of carbon
dioxide per household per year.
A family car with a petrol engine uses about
160 grams per kilometre, compared with
about 100 grams per kilometre for a small
car or 300 grams
per kilometre for a
large 4 × 4.

Carbon calculator

1 Carbon dioxide emission (kg) = Distance (km) × 0.17

a Work out the carbon dioxide emission for a distance of
8 kilometres. Give your answer in grams.
b A school bus holds 75 passengers.
Work out the carbon dioxide
emissions per person.
c Work out the carbon dioxide emissions for a person
travelling 8 kilometres by family car.

122
FM Ch 9 Carbon footprint PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:53 Page 123

Food miles

The food you eat may

2 have travelled across
the globe to reach
your plate.
For example:
Strawberries from Turkey: 1760 miles
Peas from Egypt: 2181 miles
Tomatoes from Mexico: 5551 miles
How many miles is this altogether?
Round your answer to the nearest thousand.

Carbon dioxide
emissions per person

a Work out the difference between the

3 average yearly carbon dioxide
emissions of people in the UK and
the USA.
b A rule for working out the average
yearly carbon dioxide emissions of
people in China is to add 0.2 to the
UK figure and divide by 3. Use this
rule to work out the figure for China.

Save energy

If 5000 households turn down their

4 thermostat by one degree for a year, how
much carbon dioxide would be saved?
Give your answer in tonnes.

123
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 124

CHAPTER 10
1 Algebra 3
1
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
What square
some simple numbers
number patterns
and How and
Odd to find
even
thenumbers
term-to-term
that younumbers
triangle may haveare
seen before, rule
Timesin tables
a sequence
up to 10 × 10
and how
How to describe
to draw them
graphs from How to plot coordinates
how to create sequences and
functions How to solve simple equations
describe
How to usethem in words
algebra to solve
how to generate and describe
problems
simple
How towhole-number
use a calculator to find
sequences
square roots

Square numbers and square roots

When we multiply any number by itself, the answer is called the square of the number or
the number squared. We call this operation squaring. We show it by putting a small 2 at
the top right-hand corner of the number being squared. For example:
4 × 4 = 42 = 16
The result of squaring a number is also called a square number. The first ten square
numbers are shown below.

1×1 2×2 3×3 4×4 5×5 6×6 7×7 8×8 9×9 10 × 10

12 22 32 42 52 62 72 82 92 102
1 4 9 16 25 36 49 64 81 100

You need to learn all of these.

The square root of a number is that number which, when squared, gives the starting
number. It is the opposite of finding the square of a number. We represent a square root
by the symbol √. For example:
√1 = 1 √4 = 2 √9 = 3 √16 = 4 √25 = 5
Only the square root of a square number will give an integer (whole number) as the answer.

Exercise 10A
4 Look at the pattern on the right.
a Copy this pattern and draw the next
two shapes in the pattern.
Pattern 1 Pattern 2 Pattern 3

b What is special about the total

number of dots in each pattern 1+3 4+5
number? 1 4 9

124
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 125

c What is special about the number of blue dots in each pattern number?
d
e
What is special about the number of red dots in each pattern number?
Write down a connection between square numbers and odd numbers.
4
45 = 9 + 36 = 32 + 62
Give each of the following numbers as the sum of two square numbers, as above.
a 29 b 34 c 65 d 100 e 82
f 25 g 85 h 73 i 106 j 58

You should have noticed from Question 2f above that 32 + 42 = 52.

This is a special square sum (made up of only square numbers). There are many to
be found. See which of the following pairs of squares will give you a special
square sum.

52 + 122 32 + 72 62 + 82

52 + 92 102 + 242 72 + 242

Write down the value represented by each of the following. Do not use a calculator.
a √16 b √36 c √4 d √49 e √1
f √9 g √100 h √81 i √25 j √64

With the aid of a calculator, write down the value represented by each of the
following.
a √289 b √961 c √529 d √2500 e √1296
f √729 g √3249 h √361 i √3969 j √1764

Make an estimate of each of the following square roots. Then use your calculator to
see how many you got right.
a √256 b √1089 c √625 d √2704 e √1444
f √841 g √3481 h √441 i √4096 j √2025

1 a Choose any two square numbers: for example, m and n.

b Multiply them together: m × n = R.
c What is the square root of this result, √R?
d Can you find a connection between this square root and the two
starting numbers?
e Try this again for more square numbers.
f Is the connection the same no matter what two square numbers you
choose?
2 See if you can find any more sets of the special square sums.

125
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 126

Triangle numbers
The number of dots used to make each
triangle in this pattern form the sequence of
triangle numbers.
The first few triangle numbers are 1 3 6
1, 3, 6, 10, 15, 21, 28, 36, 45, ...
You need to remember how to generate the sequence of triangle numbers.

4 Exercise 10B Look at the following sequence.

Pattern number 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
Number of blue dots 1 3 6
Number of yellow dots 0 1 3
Total number of dots 1 4 9

a Continue the sequence for the next three shapes.

b Complete the table to show the number of dots in each shape.
c What is special about the number of blue dots?
d What is special about the number of yellow dots?
e What is special about the total number of dots in each pattern number?
f Write down a connection between triangle numbers and square numbers.

Look at the numbers in the box on the right.

1 2 3 5 6 9
Write down the numbers that are:
10 13 15 18 21
a square numbers d multiples of 5
25 26 28 29 36
b triangle numbers e factors of 100
c even numbers f prime numbers 38 64 75 93 100

Each of the following numbers can be given as the sum of two triangle numbers.
Write each sum in full.
a 7 b 24 c 16 d 31
e 21 f 25 g 36 h 42

a Write down the first 12 triangular numbers.

b How many of these numbers are i even ii odd.
c How many of these numbers are multiples of 3?
d Look at the numbers that are not multiples of 3. What is special about them all?
e Test parts b to d with the next 12 triangle numbers.
f What do you notice about your answers to part e?

126
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 127

1 and 36 are both square numbers and triangular numbers. Which are the next
two numbers to be both square and triangular? You will need to use a spreadsheet
6
as the numbers are quite large. Hint: the first is between the 40th and 50th square
number and the next is a few below the 300th triangular number.

From mappings to graphs

Think about the function +1 .
+1
We can show this function in a diagram (right). Input Output
If we put the numbers together to form 1 2
ordered pairs, we get: 2 3
(1, 2), (2, 3), (3, 4), (4, 5), (5, 6) 3 4
4 5
We have chosen just five starting points,
5 6
but we could have chosen many more.
We can use these ordered pairs as y
coordinates, and plot them on a pair 10
of axes, as shown on the right.
9
Notice how we use the first number
to go along to the right, and the 8
second number to go up. We can
7
join up all the points with a straight
line. 6

0 x
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Exercise 10C For each of the following:

i Complete the input/output diagram.
ii Complete the coordinates alongside.
iii Plot the coordinates and draw the graph.
a b
The same Coordinates +2 Coordinates
0 0 (0, 0) 0 2 (0, 2)
1 1 (1, 1) 1 3 (1, 3)
2 (2, ) 2 (2, )
3 (3, ) 3 (3, )
4 (4, ) 4 (4, )
5 (5, ) 5 (5, )

127
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 128

c d
×2 Coordinates ×2 –1 Coordinates
0 0 (0, 0) 1 1 (1, 1)
1 2 (1, 2) 2 3 (2, 3)
2 (2, ) 3 (3, )
3 (3, ) 4 (4, )
4 (4, ) 5 (5, )
5 (5, ) 6 (6, )

e f
×2 +3 Coordinates ×3 –2 Coordinates
0 3 (0, 3) 1 1 (1, 1)
1 5 (1, 5) 2 4 (2, 4)
2 (2, ) 3 (3, )
3 (3, ) 4 (4, )
4 (4, ) 5 (5, )
5 (5, ) 6 (6, )

Choose some of your own starting points and create a graph from each of the
following functions.
a +3 b ×3 +2

c ×2 –3 d ×4 –3

a Draw a mapping diagram for the function square

b Use the mapping to help you find some coordinates. Then draw the graph.

Naming graphs
When we use coordinates, we call the left-hand number the x-coordinate and
the right-hand number the y-coordinate.
This means we can write a general coordinate pair as (x, y).
What do you notice about the coordinates y
(0, 3), (1, 3), (2, 3), (3, 3), (4, 3)?
4
The second number, the y-coordinate, is always 3.
3
In other words, y = 3.
Look what happens when we plot it. 2

0 x
0 1 2 3 4 5

128
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 129

See also the graphs of y = 2 and y = 5, shown below.

y y

6 6
y=5
5 5

4 4

3 3
y=2
2 2

1 1

0 x 0 x
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

Note: The graphs are always horizontal lines for y = A, where A is any fixed number.
y
When we repeat this for an x-value,
say x = 2, we get a vertical line, as shown. x=2
3

0 x
0 1 2 3 4 5

Exercise 10D Write down the name of the straight y

line that goes through each of these 8
pairs of points on the diagram. A B
7
a A and B b C and D
c E and F d G and H 6
H C G
e I and D f J and D 5
g K and A h G and F
4
I D
Draw each of the following graphs on 3
the same grid, and label them. 2
K E F

a y=1 b y=4 J
1
c y=6 d x=1
0 x
e x=3 f x=5 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Axes
x-axis from 0 to 7
y-axis from 0 to 7

129
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 130

Write down the letters that are on y

each of the following lines. 8
a x=1 b y=1 A
7
c y=6 d y=2 M L D
6
e x=3 f x=2
B
g y=4 h x=5 5
G H I
i x=6 j y=3 4
C E
3
Draw each of the following pairs of
F N
lines on the same grid. Write down 2
the coordinates of the point where K J
1
they cross.
0 x
a y = 1 and x = 3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
b y = 4 and x = 1
c x = 5 and y = 6

Here are eight pairs of coordinates:

A(2, 3) B(3, 5) C(7, 3) D(2, 5) E(3, 7) F(7, 4) G(3, 4) H(7, 7)
Try to write down the names of the straight lines that the following points are
on. Then plot the points on the graphs to check your answers.
a A and C b B and D c C and F d A and D
e E and H f F and G g B and G h C and H

Naming sloping lines

Here is the input/output diagram which uses the function The same , and the
graph it produces.
y
The same Coordinates
5
0 0 (0, 0)
1 1 (1, 1) 4
2 2 (2, 2) 3
3 3 (3, 3)
4 4 (4, 4) 2
5 5 (5, 5) 1

0 x
0 1 2 3 4 5

We give this straight-line graph the name y = x, because the x-coordinate is always the
same as the y-coordinate.

130
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 131

Exercise 10E Copy and complete the following input/output diagram for each of the given
functions. 6
function Coordinates a +1
0 ? (0, ) b +2
1 ? (1, )
2 ? (2, ) c +3
3 ? (3, )
4 ? (4, ) d +4
5 ? (5, )
e +5

Plot each set of coordinates from Question 1 on the same grid and match the
following names to each straight line. Write the name on the line.
y=x+1 y=x+3 y=x+5 y=x+2 y=x+4

Write down pairs of values for x and y that are true for these equations (they
do not have to be pairs of whole numbers).
a x+y=6 b x+y=8 c x+y=3
Plot the values on a graph.
Describe anything you notice.

4 I can recognise the square numbers 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, etc.

I know all the square numbers from 12 to 152.
I know the square roots of square numbers from 1 to 225.
I can work out square numbers with a calculator.
I can find square roots using a calculator.
I can estimate square roots of numbers up to 200.
I can recognise the triangular number pattern and the triangle numbers, 1, 3, 6, 10, 15, 21, …
I can continue the triangular number pattern for at least ten terms up to the triangle number 55.

5 I can work out and plot coordinates using a mapping diagram of an algebraic relationship such as
y = x + 2, i.e.
2 → 4
3 → 5
4 → 6
I can test if a coordinate such as (3, 4) obeys an algebraic relationship such as y = x – 1,
i.e. 4 ≠ 3 – 1.

6 I can draw the graph of a simple algebraic relationship such as y = 2x by working out coordinate
points, i.e. (3, 6), (4, 8), etc.

131
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 132

1 2000 Paper 2

a Write down the next two numbers in the sequence below.

1 4 9 16 25

b Describe the pattern in part a in your own words.

2 2000 Paper 1
These straight line graphs all pass through the point (10, 10).
y

12

A
10

6
B E

4
D
C
2

0 x
–4 –2 0 2 4 6 8 10 12

–2

–4

a Which line has the equation x = 10?

b Which line has the equation y = 10?

c Which line has the equation y = x?

d Which line has the equation y = 1.5x – 5?

e Which line has the equation y = 0.5x + 5?

132
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 133

3 2003 Paper 2

6
y
B
2
The diagram shows a square drawn on a square grid.

1
The points A, B, C and D are at the vertices of the square.
C A
0
x
–2 –1 0 1 2

–1

–2
D

Match the correct line to each equation. Line through C and D

One is done for you.
y=0
Line through A and C

x=0 Line through A and D

x+y=2 Line through B and D

Line through B and C

x + y = –2
Line through A and B

133
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 134

CHAPTER 11 Geometry and Measures 3

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to measure and draw How to use a protractor to
angles measure and draw angles
How to construct triangles and How to calculate angles on a
other shapes straight line and around a point
The geometrical properties of How to calculate angles in a
triangles and quadrilaterals triangle

Measuring and drawing angles

Notice that on a semicircular protractor there are two scales. The outer scale goes from 0° to
180°, and the inner one goes from 180° to 0°. It is important that you use the correct scale.
When measuring or drawing an angle, always decide first whether it is an acute angle or
an obtuse angle.

Example 11.1 First, decide whether the angle to be measured

is acute or obtuse. This is an acute angle 90 100
80 110
(less than 90°). 70 100 90 80
0 1 0 70 12
6 1 0
0 60 13
Place the centre of the protractor 12
50 0 50 0
13
at the corner of the angle, as in

14 0
14 0
4
0

0
4
the diagram.

15
30
0

30
0
15

The two angles shown on the

160
180 170 20
160

20
protractor scales are 60° and

170 180
10

10
120°. Since you are measuring
an acute angle, the angle is 60°

0
0

(to the nearest degree).

Example 11.2 Measure the size of this reflex angle.

First, measure the inside or interior
170 180

180 170 20
0
0

angle. This is an obtuse angle.

10

10

The two angles shown on the

160 30
20
160

protractor scales are 30° and 150°.

15
30
0

0
15

Since you are measuring an obtuse

14 0
1 0
4
0

0
4
4

angle, the angle is 150°. 50 0

13
50 0
13 12
60 0
The size of the reflex angle is found 12
0
80
70
90
60 110
70 100
110
by subtracting this angle from 360°. 100 90 80

The reflex angle is therefore 360° – 150°,

which is 210° (to the nearest degree).

134
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 135

Exercise 11A Measure the size of each of the following angles, giving your answer to the nearest
degree.

a b

c d

Draw and label each of the following angles.

a 20° b 35° c 72° d 100° e 145°
f 168° g 220° h 258° i 300° j 347°

a Measure the three angles in triangle ABC. A

b Add the three angles together.
c Comment on your answer.

B C

135
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 136

Estimating angles
● Copy the table below.
Angle Estimate Actual Difference
1
2
3
4

● Estimate the size of each of the four angles below and complete the Estimate
column in the table.

1 2 3 4

● Now measure the size of each angle to the nearest degree and complete
the Actual column.
● Work out the difference between your estimate and the actual
measurement for each angle and complete the Difference column.

Constructions
You need to be able to draw a shape exactly from information given on a diagram, using a
ruler and a protractor. This is known as constructing a shape.
When constructing a shape you need to draw lines to the nearest millimetre and the
angles to the nearest degree.

Example 11.3 Construct the triangle ABC. A

● Draw line BC 7.5 cm long.
● Draw an angle of 50° at B.
4.1 cm
● Draw line AB 4.1 cm long.
● Join AC to complete the triangle. 50°
B C
The completed, full-sized triangle is given below. 7.5 cm
A

4.1 cm

50°
B C
7.5 cm

136
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 137

Example 11.4 Construct the triangle XYZ. X

● Draw line YZ 8.3 cm long.
● Draw an angle of 42° at Y.
● Draw an angle of 51° at Z.
● Extend both angle lines to intersect at X to 51°
42°
complete the triangle. Y Z
8.3 cm
The completed, full-sized triangle is given below.
X

42° 51°
Y Z
8.3 cm

Exercise 11B Construct each of the following triangles. Remember to label all lines and angles.
a b c d
A G
D
J
6 cm
5 cm
135° 70° 130°
60° 45° 20°
B C E F H I K L
5 cm 7 cm 7 cm 5 cm

a Construct the triangle PQR. P

b Measure the size of ∠P and ∠R to
the nearest degree.
8 cm
c Measure the length of the line PR to
the nearest millimetre.
65°
Q R
C 10 cm

Construct the triangle ABC with ∠A = 100°, ∠B = 40° and AB = 8 cm.

A B
A B
a
b
Construct the trapezium ABCD.
Measure the size of ∠B
6
to the nearest degree. 6.3 cm
c Measure the length of
the lines AB and BC to 48°
the nearest millimetre. D 12.5 cm C

137
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 138

6 1 Construct the parallelogram ABCD with AB = 7.4 cm, AD = 6.4 cm,

∠A = 50° and ∠B = 130°. P
2 a Construct the quadrilateral PQRS. Q
b Measure ∠P and ∠Q to the nearest degree.
c Measure the length of the line PQ to the 6.5 cm
6 cm
nearest millimetre.
3 If you have access to ICT facilities, find
70° 80°
out how to draw triangles using computer
software packages such as LOGO. R S
7 cm

Solving geometrical problems

Types of triangle

Scalene triangle Obtuse-angled triangle Right-angled triangle

(no equal sides)

Isosceles triangle Equilateral triangle

(two equal sides) (three equal sides)

Types of quadrilateral

Square Rectangle Parallelogram Rhombus

Trapezium Kite Arrowhead or delta

138
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 139

Exercise 11C Which quadrilaterals have the following properties?

a Four equal sides
b Two different pairs of equal sides
c Two pairs of parallel sides
d Only one pair of parallel sides
e Adjacent sides equal

Explain the difference between:

a a square and a rhombus.
b a rhombus and a parallelogram.
c a trapezium and a parallelogram.

How many distinct triangles can be constructed

on this 3 by 3 pin-board?
Use square dotted paper to record your triangles.
Below each one, write down what type of triangle it is.
Here are two examples:

Copy this square on a piece of card. Then draw

in the two diagonals and cut out the four triangles.
10 cm
6
How many different triangles or quadrilaterals can
you make with the following?
a Four of the triangles 10 cm
b Three of the triangles
c Two of the triangles

How many distinct quadrilaterals can be constructed on this 3 by 3

pin-board?
Use square dotted paper to record your quadrilaterals. Below each
one, write down what type of quadrilateral it is.
Here are two examples:

139
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 140

4 I can recognise the different types of angle.

I know the names of the different types of triangles and quadrilaterals.

5 I can draw and measure angles.

I can draw triangles from given information.

6 I know all the properties of different quadrilaterals.

1 2001 Paper 1
4 a I start with a rectangle of paper. I fold it in half, then I cut out three shapes.

Then I unfold my paper. Which diagram below shows what my paper looks like now?

A B C D E
b I start again with a different rectangle of paper. I fold it in half, then in half again, then I cut out two
shapes.

Then I unfold my paper. Which diagram below shows what my paper looks like now?

A B C D E

140
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 141

c I start with a square of paper. I fold it in half, then in half again, then I cut out one shape.

4
Then I unfold my paper. Which diagram below shows what my paper looks like now?

A B C D E

2 2000 Paper 1

Look at these angles.

Angle P Angle Q Angle R Angle S Angle T

a One of the angles measures 120°

Write its letter.

b Complete the drawing below to show an angle of 157°

Label the angle 157°

141
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 142

CHAPTER 12 Number 4
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to find simple percentages How to find equivalent
and use them to compare fractions, percentages and
proportions decimals
How to work out ratio, leading How to find multiples of 10% of
into simple direct proportion a quantity
How to solve problems using Division facts from tables up to
ratio 10 × 10

Percentages
One of these labels is from a packet of porridge oats. The other is from a toffee cake.
Compare the percentages of protein, carbohydrates, fat and fibre.

PORRIDGE OATS TOFFEE CAKE

Typical values per 100 g Typical values per 100 g
Energy 1555 kJ/ Energy 1421 kJ/
372 kcal 340 kcal
Protein 7.5 g Protein 2.9 g
Carbohydrates 71 g Carbohydrates 39.1 g
Fat 6.0 g Fat 19.1 g
Fibre 6.0 g Fibre 0.3 g
Sodium 0.3 g Sodium 0.2 g

Example 12.1 Without using a calculator find: a 12% of £260 b 39% of 32

a 12% = 10% + 1% + 1% = 26 + 2.6 + 2.6 = £31.20
b 39% = 10% + 10% + 10% + 10% – 1% = 4 × 3.2 – 0.32 = 12.8 – 0.32 = 12.48

Example 12.2 Work out: a 6% of £190 b 63% of 75 eggs

a (6 ÷ 100) × 190 = £11.40
b (63 ÷ 100) × 75 = 47.25 = 47 eggs

Example 12.3 Which is greater, 42% of 560 or 62% of 390?

(42 ÷ 100) × 560 = 235.2 (62 ÷ 100) × 390 = 241.8
62% of 390 is greater.

142
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 143

Exercise 12A Write each percentage as a combination of simple percentages. The first two have
been done for you. 4
a 12% = 10% + 1% + 1% b 49% = 50% – 1%
c 31% d 18%
e 11% f 28%
g 52% h 99%

Use your answers to question 1 to work out each of the following.

a 12% of 320 b 49% of 45 c 31% of 260 d 18% of 68
e 11% of 12 f 28% of 280 g 52% of 36 h 99% of 206

Work out each of these.

a 13% of £560 b 46% of 64 books c 73% of 190 chairs
d 34% of £212 e 64% of 996 pupils f 57% of 120 buses
g 37% of 109 plants h 78% of 345 bottles i 62% of 365 days
j 93% of 2564 people k 54% of 456 fish l 45% of £45
m 65% of 366 eggs n 7% of £684 o 9% of 568 chickens

Which is bigger:
a 45% of 68 or 34% of 92? b 22% of £86 or 82% of £26? 6
c 28% of 79 or 69% of 31? d 32% of 435 or 43% of 325?

Write down or work out the equivalent percentage and decimal to each of these
fractions.
1 2 1 3 1
a 5 b 5 c 4 d 4 e 8
3 1 3 1 21
f 8 g 20 h 20 i 25 j 25

Write down or work out the equivalent percentage and fraction to each of these
decimals.
a 0.1 b 0.3 c 0.8 d 0.75
e 0.34 f 0.85 g 0.31

Write down or work out the equivalent fraction and decimal to each of these
percentages.
a 5% b 15% c 62% d 62.55%
e 80% f 8% g 66.6%

Javid scores 17 out of 25 on a maths test, 14 out of 20 on a science test and 33 out of
50 on an English test. Work out each score as a percentage.

Arrange these numbers in order of increasing size.

6 3 11
a 21%, 25 , 0.2 b 0.39, 38%, 8 c 20 , 54%, 0.53

143
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 144

The pie chart shows the percentage of each constituent

of the toffee cake given in the label on page 142.
Protein
Draw a pie chart to show the percentage of each
constituent of the porridge oats given on the same Carbohydrates
page.
Obtain labels from a variety of cereals and other Fat
food items. Draw a pie chart for each of them.
Fibre
What types of food have the most fat? What types
of food have the most energy? Sodium
Is there a connection between the energy of
food and the fat and carbohydrate content?

Ratio and proportion

Look at the fish tank. There are three types of fish – plain,
striped and spotted.
What proportion of the fish are plain? What proportion are
striped? What proportion are spotted?
What is the ratio of plain fish to striped fish?
What is the ratio of striped fish to spotted fish?
What is the ratio of plain fish to striped fish?
Proportion is a way of comparing the parts of a quantity to the
whole quantity.

Example 12.4 What proportion of this metre rule is shaded? What is the ratio of the shaded part to
the unshaded part?

40 cm out of 100 cm are shaded. This is 40% (or 0.4 or –52 ).The ratio of shaded to
unshaded is 40 : 60 = 2 : 3.

Example 12.5 A fruit drink is made by mixing 20 cl of orange juice with 60 cl of pineapple juice.
What is the proportion of orange juice in the drink?
Total volume of drink is 20 + 60 = 80 cl.
20 = –
The proportion of orange is 20 out of 80 = – 1.
80 4

Example 12.6 Another fruit drink is made by mixing orange juice and grapefruit juice.
The proportion of orange is 40%. 60 cl of orange juice is used. What proportion
of grapefruit is used? How much grapefruit juice is used?
The proportion of grapefruit is 100% – 40% = 60%. Now 40% = 60 cl,
so 10% = 15 cl. Hence, 60% = 90 cl of grapefruit juice.

144
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 145

Example 12.7 Five pens cost £3.25. How much do 8 pens cost?
First, work out the cost of 1 pen: £3.25 ÷ 5 = £0.65
Hence, 8 pens cost 8 × £0.65 = £5.20

Exercise 12B

Three bars of soap cost £1.80. How much would:

a 1 bar cost? b 12 bars cost? c 30 bars cost? 4
One euro is worth £0.62. How many pounds will I get for each of the following
numbers of euros?
a 5 euros b 8 euros c 600 euros

These are the ingredients to make four pancakes.

a How much of each ingredient will be needed to 1 egg
make 12 pancakes? 3 ounces of plain flour
b How much of each ingredient will be needed to 5 fluid ounces of milk
make six pancakes?

For each of these metre rules:

i What proportion of the rule is shaded?
ii What is the ratio of the shaded part to the unshaded part?
a
b
c
d

For each bag of black and white balls:

i What proportion of the balls are black?
ii What is the ratio of black to white balls?
a b c d

Tom and Jerry have some coins. This table shows the coins they have.

1p 2p 5p 10p 20p 50p

Tom 15 45 50 80 20 40
Jerry 18 36 72 24 20 30

a How much do they each have altogether?

b How many coins do they each have?

145
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 146

c Copy and complete the table below, which shows the proportion of each coin
that they have.

1p 2p 5p 10p 20p 50p

Tom 6% 18%
Jerry

d Add up the proportions for Tom and for Jerry. Explain your answer.

One litre of fruit squash contains 24 cl of fruit concentrate and the rest is water.
a What proportion of the drink is fruit concentrate?
b What proportion of the drink is water?

The ratio of British cars to foreign cars in the staff car park is 1 : 4. Explain why the
proportion of British cars is 20% and not 25%.

Steve wears only red or black socks. The ratio of red to black pairs that he owns
is 1 : 3. If he doesn’t favour any particular colour, what proportion of days will he
wear red socks?

Direct proportion can be used to solve problems such as: In 6 hours, a woman
earns £42. How much would she earn in 5 hours?
First, you have to work out how much she earns in 1 hour: 42 ÷ 6 = £7. Then
multiply this by 5 to get how much she earns in 5 hours: 5 × £7 = £35.
Answer the following questions but be careful! Two of them are trick questions.
1 3 kg of sugar cost £1.80. How much do 4 kg of sugar cost?
2 A man can run 10 km in 40 minutes. How long does he take to run 12 km?
3 In two days my watch loses 20 seconds. How much time does it lose in a week?
4 It takes me 5 seconds to dial the 10 digit number of a friend who lives 100 km
away. How long does it take me to dial the 10 digit number of a friend who
lives 200 miles away?
5 A jet aircraft with 240 people on board takes 2 h 30 min to fly 1000 km. How
long would the same aircraft take to fly 1500 km when it had only 120 people
on board?

Calculating ratios and proportions

The fish have been breeding!
What is the ratio of striped fish to spotted fish?
What is the ratio of plain fish to spotted fish?
What is the ratio of plain fish to striped fish?
If five more plain fish are added to the tank, how
many more striped fish would have to be added to
keep the ratio of plain to striped the same?

146
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 147

Example 12.8 Reduce the following ratios to their simplest form: a 4 : 6 b 5 : 25

a The highest common factor of 4 and 6 is 2. So, divide 2 into both values, giving
4 : 6 = 2 : 3.
b The highest common factor of 5 and 25 is 5. So, divide 5 into both values,
giving 5 : 25 = 1 : 5.

Example 12.9 A fruit drink is made by mixing 20 cl of orange juice with 60 cl of pineapple juice.
What is the ratio of orange juice to pineapple juice?
Orange : pineapple = 20 : 60 = 1 : 3 (cancel by 20).

Example 12.10 Another fruit drink is made by mixing orange juice and grapefruit juice in the ratio
2 : 5. 60 cl of orange juice are used. How much grapefruit juice is needed?
The problem is 60 : ? = 2 : 5. You will see that, instead of cancelling, your need to
multiply by 30. So, 2 : 5 = 60 : 150.
Hence, 150 cl of grapefruit juice will be needed.

Exercise 12C Reduce each of the following ratios to its simplest form.
a 4:8 b 3:9 c 2 : 10 d 9 : 12 e 5 : 20 f 8 : 10 4
g 4:6 h 10 : 15 i 2 : 14 j 4 : 14 k 6 : 10 l 25:30

Write down the ratio of black : white from each of these metre rules.
a
b
c

There are 300 lights on a Christmas tree. 120 are white, 60 are blue, 45 are green
and the rest are yellow.
a Write down the percentage of each colour.
b Write down each of the following ratios in its simplest form.
i white : blue ii blue : green
iii green : yellow iv white : blue : green : yellow

To make jam, Josh uses strawberries to preserving sugar in the ratio 3 cups : 1 cup.
a How many cups of each will he need to make 20 cups of jam altogether?
b If he has 12 cups of strawberries, how many cups of sugar will he need?
c If he has 2 12 cups of sugar, how many cups of strawberries will he need?

147
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 148

Proportion can be used to solve ‘best buy’ problems.

For example: A large tin of dog food costs 96p and contains 500 grams.
A small tin costs 64p and contains 300 grams. Which tin is the better value?
For each tin, work out how much 1 gram costs.
Large tin: 500 ÷ 96 = 5.2 grams per penny.
Small tin: 300 ÷ 64 = 4.7 grams per penny. So, the large tin is the better buy.
1 A bottle of shampoo costs £2.62 and contains 30 cl. A different bottle of the
same shampoo costs £1.50 and contains 20 cl. Which is the better buy?
2 A large roll of Sellotape has 25 metres of tape and costs 75p. A small roll of
Sellotape has 15 metres of tape and costs 55p. Which roll is better value?
3 A pad of A4 paper costs £1.10 and has 120 sheets. A thicker pad of A4
paper costs £1.50 and has 150 sheets. Which pad is the better buy?
4 A small tin of peas contains 250 grams and costs 34p. A large tin costs 70p
and contains 454 grams. Which tin is the better buy?

Solving problems
A painter has a 5-litre can of blue paint and 3 litres of yellow paint in a 5-litre can (Picture 1).

Picture 1 Picture 2 Picture 3

He pours 2 litres of blue paint into the other can (Picture 2) and mixes it thoroughly.
He then pours 1 litre from the second can back into the first can (Picture 3) and mixes it
thoroughly.
How much blue paint is in the first can now?

Example 12.11 Divide £150 in the ratio 1 : 5.

There are 1 + 5 = 6 portions. This gives £150 ÷ 6 = £25 per portion. So one share of
the £150 is 1 × 25 = £25, and the other share is 5 × £25 = £125.

Example 12.12 Two-fifths of a packet of bulbs are daffodils. The rest are tulips. What is the ratio of
daffodils to tulips?
2:–
Ratio is – 3 = 2 : 3.
5 5

148
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 149

Exercise 12D Divide £100 in the ratio:

a 2:3 b 1: 9 c 3:7
6
d 1: 3 e 9 : 11

There are 350 pupils in a primary school. The ratio of girls to boys is 3 : 2. How
many boys and girls are there in the school?

Freda has 120 CDs. The ratio of pop CDs to dance CDs is 5 : 7. How many of
each type of CD are there?

James is saving 50p coins and £1 coins. He has 75 coins. The ratio of 50p coins
to £1 coins is 7 : 8. How much money does he have altogether?

Mr Smith has 24 calculators in a box. The ratio of ordinary calculators to

scientific calculators is 5 : 1. How many of each type of calculator does he have?

An exam consists of three parts. A mental test, a non-calculator paper and a

calculator paper. The ratio of marks for each is 1 : 3 : 4. The whole exam is worth
120 marks. How many marks does each part of the exam get?

a There are 15 bottles on the wall. The ratio of green bottles to brown bottles is
1 : 4. How many green bottles are there on the wall?
b One green bottle accidentally falls. What is the ratio of green to brown bottles now?

a Forty-nine trains pass through Barnsley station each day. They go to Huddersfield
or Leeds in the ratio 3 : 4. How many trains go to Huddersfield?
b One day, due to driver shortages, six of the Huddersfield trains are cancelled and
three of the Leeds trains are cancelled. What is the ratio of Huddersfield trains to
Leeds trains that day?

Uncle Fred has decided to give his nephew and niece, Jack and Jill, £100 between
them. He decides to split the £100 in the ratio of their ages. Jack is 4 and Jill is 6.
a How much do each get?
b The following year he does the same thing with another £100. How
much do each get now?
c He continues to give them £100 shared in the ratio of their ages for
another 8 years. How much will each get each year?
d After the 10 years, how much of the £1000 given in total will Jack have?
How much will Jill have?

149
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 150

4 I can recognise simple proportions of a whole and describe them using fractions or percentages.
I can work out simple percentages.

5 I can write down and simplify ratios.

I can calculate a percentage of a quantity.

6 I can divide a quantity in a given ratio.

1 2004 4–6 Paper 2 50 g ginger

4 Here are the ingredients for a cordial used to make a drink. 1 lemon
1.5 litres of water
900 g sugar

a Jenny is going to make this cordial with 25 g of ginger. 25 g ginger

How much lemon, water and sugar should she use? … lemon
… litres of water
b The finished drink should be 13 cordial and 23 water. … g sugar
Jenny puts 100 ml of cordial in a glass.
How much water should she put with it?

2 2005 4–6 Paper 1

a Complete the sentences:

… out of ten is the same as 70%
10 out of 20 is the same as … %

b Complete the sentence:

… out of … is the same as 5%
Now complete the sentence using different numbers.
… out of … is the same as 5%

150
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:01 Page 151

3 2006 4–6 Paper 1

a Work out the missing values.

10% of 84 = … 5% of 84 = … 212% of 84 = …

b The cost of a CD player is £84 plus 1712% tax.

What is the total cost of the CD player?
You can use part a to help you.

4 2000 Paper 1
The table shows some percentages of amounts of money. £10 £30 £45
Use the table to work out: 5% 50p £1.50 £2.25
10% £1 £3 £4.50
a 15% of £30 = ……

b £6.75 = 15% of ……

c £3.50 = …… % of £10

d 25p = 5% of ……

5 2000 Paper 2

Calculate: a 8% of £26.50 b 12 –12% of £98

151
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 14

CHAPTER 2 Number 1
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to work with decimals and How to write and read whole
whole numbers numbers and decimals
How to use estimation to check How to write tenths and
your answers hundredths as decimals
How to solve problems using Times tables up to 10 × 10
decimals and whole numbers, How to use a calculator to do
with and without a calculator simple calculations

Decimals
Look at this picture. What do the decimal numbers mean? How would you say them?

half Fly to
BIG JAM ma r at h o n
Chews
1.362 kg 3p each 13.1 miles AFRICA
21.09 km 3.30 hours
from Luton
1 1.5 2
SPECIAL OFFER
CAKES HALF PRICE
were £1.99 now £0.99

When you multiply by 100, all the digits are moved two places to the left.

Example 2.1 Work out 3.5 × 100.

Thousandths
Hundredths
Thousands
Hundreds

Tenths
Units
Tens

3 ● 5
3 5 0 ●

14
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 15

The digits move one place to the left when you multiply by 10, and three places to the left
when you multiply by 1000.
When you divide by 1000, all the digits move three places to the right.

Example 2.2 Work out 23 ÷ 1000.

Thousandths
Hundredths
Thousands
Hundreds

Tenths
Units
Tens
2 3 ●

0 ● 0 2 3

In the same way, the digits move one place to the right when you divide by 10, and two
places to the right when you divide by 100.

Exercise 2A Without using a calculator work out:

a 34 × 10 b 89 × 100 c 7 × 100 4
d 4 × 1000 e 34 ÷ 10 f 89 ÷ 100
g 7 ÷ 100 h 4 ÷ 1000 i 58 ÷ 1000

Find the missing number in each case.

a 3 × 10 = b 3× = 300
c 3 ÷ 10 = d 3÷ = 0.03

Without using a calculator work out:

a 4.5 × 10 b 0.6 × 10 c 5.3 × 100
d 0.03 × 100 e 5.8 × 1000 f 0.7 × 1000
g 4.5 ÷ 10 h 0.6 ÷ 10 i 5.3 ÷ 100
j 0.03 ÷ 100 k 5.8 ÷ 1000 l 0.04 ÷ 10
m 5.01 ÷ 10 n 6.378 × 100

Find the missing number in each case.

a 0.3 × 10 = b 0.3 × = 300 c 0.3 ÷ 10 =
d 0.3 ÷ = 0.003 e ÷ 100 = 0.03 f ÷ 10 = 30
g × 1000 = 30 000 h × 10 = 300

Fill in the missing operation in each case.

a 0.37 → → 37 b 567 → → 5.67

c 0.07 → → 70 d 650 → → 65

e 0.6 → → 0.006 f 345 → → 0.345

15
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 16

Copy, complete and work out the total of this shopping bill:
1000 chews at £0.03 each = ……
100 packets of mints at £0.23 each = ……
10 cans of pop at £0.99 each = ……

Design a poster to explain clearly how to multiply and/or divide a number by

10, 100 or 1000.

Ordering decimals

Name Leroy Myrtle Jack Baby Jane Alf Doris

Age 37.4 21 32 12 9 months 57 68 yrs 3 mths
Height 170 cm 1.54 m 189 cm 0.55 m 102 cm 1.80 m
Weight 75 kg 50.3 kg 68 kg 7.5 kg 85 kg 76 kg 300 g

Look at the people in the picture. How would you put them in order?
When you compare the size of numbers, you have to

Thousandths
Hundredths
consider the place value of each digit.
Thousands
Hundreds

It helps if you fill in the numbers in a table like the

Tenths
Units
Tens

one shown on the right.

The decimal point separates the whole-number part
of the number from the decimal-fraction part. 2 ● 3 3 0
2 ● 0 3 0
2 ● 3 0 4

Example 2.3 Put the numbers 2.33, 2.03 and 2.304 in order, from smallest to largest.
The numbers are shown in the table. Zeros have been added to make up the missing
decimal places.
Working across the table from the left, you can see that all of the numbers have the
same units digit. Two of them have the same tenths digit, and two have the same
hundredths digit. But only one has a digit in the thousandths. The order is:
2.03, 2.304 and 2.33

16
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 17

Example 2.4 Put the correct sign, > or <, between each of these pairs of numbers.
a 6.05 and 6.046 b 0.06 and 0.065
a Both numbers have the same units and tenths digits, but the hundredths digit is
bigger in the first number. So the answer is 6.05 > 6.046.
b Both numbers have the same units, tenths and hundredths digits, but the second
number has the bigger thousandths digit, as the first number has a zero in the
thousandths. So the answer is 0.06 < 0.065.

Exercise 2B a Copy the table on page 16 (but not the numbers). Write the following numbers
in the table, placing each digit in the appropriate column. 4
4.57, 45, 4.057, 4.5, 0.045, 0.5, 4.05
b Use your answer to part a to write the numbers in order from smallest to largest.

Write each of these sets of numbers in order from smallest to largest.

a 0.73, 0.073, 0.8, 0.709, 0.7
b 1.203, 1.03, 1.405, 1.404, 1.4
c 34, 3.4, 0.34, 2.34, 0.034

Put these amounts of money in order from smallest to largest.

a 56p £1.25 £0.60 130p £0.07
b £0.04 £1.04 101p 35p £0.37

Put these times in order: 1hour 10 minutes, 25 minutes, 1.25 hours, 0.5 hours.

Put the correct sign, > or <, between each of these pairs of numbers.
a 0.315 … 0.325 b 0.42 … 0.402 c 6.78 … 6.709
d 5.25 km … 5.225 km e 0.345 kg … 0.4 kg f £0.05 … 7p

Write each of the following statements in words.

a 3.1 < 3.14 < 3.142
b £0.07 < 32p < £0.56

One metre is 100 centimetres. Change all the lengths below to metres and then put
them in order from smallest to largest.
6.25 m, 269 cm, 32 cm, 2.7 m, 0.34 m

One kilogram is 1000 grams. Change all the weights below to kilograms and then
put them in order from smallest to largest.
467 g, 1.260 kg, 56 g, 0.5 kg, 0.055 kg

17
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 18

Choose a set of five consecutive integers (whole numbers), such as 3, 4, 5, 6, 7.

Use a calculator to work out the reciprocal of each of the five numbers. The
reciprocal is the number divided into 1. That is:
1 ÷ 3, 1 ÷ 4, 1 ÷ 5, 1 ÷ 6, 1 ÷ 7
Put the answers in order from smallest to largest.
Repeat with any five two-digit whole numbers, such as 12, 15, 20, 25, 30.
What do you notice?

Directed numbers

Temperature 32 °C Temperature –13 °C

Latitude 17° South Latitude 84° North
Time 09 30 h GMT Time 23 24 h GMT

Look at the two pictures. What are the differences between the temperatures, the latitudes
and the times?
All numbers have a sign. Positive numbers have a + sign in front of them although we do
not always write it. Negative (or minus) numbers have a – sign in front of them. We
always write the negative sign.
The positions of positive and negative numbers can be put on a number line, as below.

–10 –9 –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
This is very useful, as it helps us to compare positive and negative numbers and also to
add and subtract them.

Example 2.5 Which is bigger, –7 or –3?

Because –3 is further to the right on the line, –8 –7 –6 –5 –4 –3 –2
it is the larger number, we can write –7 < –3.

Example 2.6 Work out the answers to a 3–2–5 b –3 – 5 + 4 – 2

a Starting at zero and ‘jumping’ along the
number line gives an answer of –4. –4 0

b –3 – 5 + 4 – 2 = –6
–6 0

Example 2.7 Work out the answers to a –2 – +4 b –6 – – 3 + –2

a Rewrite as –2 – 4 and count along a number line: –2 – 4 = –6
b Rewrite as –6 + 3 – 2 and count along a number line: –6 + 3 – 2 = –5

18
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 19

Exercise 2C Put the correct sign, > or <, between each pair of numbers.
a –5 … 4 b –7 … –10 c 3 … –3 d –12 … –2
4
Find the number that is halfway between each pair of numbers.
a b c
–8 –2 –6 +3 –9 –1

Work out the answer to each of these.

a 6–9 b 4–3 c 2–7 d 3+9 e 1–3 f 4–4
g –6 + 9 h –4 – 1 i –7 – 3 j –1 + 8 k –2 – 3 l –14 + 7
m –2 – 3 + 4 n –1 + 1 – 2 o –3 + 4 – 7 p –102 + 103 – 5

Copy each of these calculations and then fill in the missing numbers.
a 3 + +1 = 4 b –2 – +1 = –3 c 4 – +2 = 2
3+0 =3 –2 – 0 = – 2 3 – +1 = 2
3 + –1 = 2 –2 – –1 = –1 2–0 =2
3 + –2 = … –2 – –2 = … 1 – –1 = …
3+… =… –2 – … = … 0–… =…
3+… =… –2 – … = … …–…=…

Work out the answer to each of these.

a +3 – +2 b –4 – –3 c +7 – –6 d –7 + –3 e +7 – +3
f –9 – –5 g –6 + +6 h +6 – –7 i –6 + –6 j –1 + –8
k +5 – +7 l 7 – –5 m –2 – –3 + – 4 n – +1 + +1 – +2

Find the missing number to make each of these true.

a +2 + –6 = b +4 + = +7 c –4 + =0
d +5 + = –1 e +3 + +4 = f – –5 = +7
g – +5 = +2 h +6 + =0 i – –5 = –2
j +2 + –2 = k – +2 = – 4 l –2 + –4 =

a A fish is 10 m below the surface of the water. A fish eagle is 15 m above the
water. How many metres must the bird descend to get the fish?
b Alf has £25 in the bank. He writes a cheque for £35. How much has he got in
the bank now?

In a magic square, the numbers in any row, column or diagonal add up to give the
same answer. Copy and complete each of these magic squares.
a b c
–7 0 –8 –2 –4 0 –13 –3
–3 –5
–2 –3 –8 –7 –9 –10
–12 –15

19
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 20

A maths test consists of 20 questions. Three points are given for a correct
answer and two points are deducted if an answer is wrong or not attempted.
● Show that it is possible to get a score of zero.
● Show clearly that all the possible scores are multiples of 5.
● What happens when there are four points for a correct answer and minus
two for a wrong answer? Investigate what happens when the points
awarded and deducted are changed.
Note: A computer spreadsheet is useful for this activity.

Estimates

UNITED v CITY
CROWD
41 923
SCORE
2–1
TIME OF FIRST GOAL
42 min 13 sec
PRICE OF A PIE
95p
CHILDREN
33% off normal
ticket prices

Which of the numbers above can be approximated? Which need to be given exactly?
You should have an idea if the answer to a calculation is about the right size or not. There
are some ways of checking answers. First, when it is a multiplication, you can check that the
final digit is correct. Second, you can round numbers off and do a mental calculation to see
if an answer is about the right size. Third, you can check by doing the inverse operation.

Example 2.8 Explain why these calculations must be wrong.

a 23 × 45 = 1053 b 19 × 59 = 121
a The last digit should be 5, because the product of the last digits is 15.
That is, 23 × 45 = …5
b The answer is roughly 20 × 60 = 1200.

Example 2.9 Estimate answers to these calculations.

a –––––––––––
21.3 + 48.7 b 31.2 × 48.5 c 359 ÷ 42
6.4
a Round off the numbers on the top to 20 + 50 = 70. Round off 6.4 to 7.
Then 70 ÷ 7 = 10.
b Round off to 30 × 50, which is 3 × 5 × 100 = 1500.
c Round off to 360 ÷ 40, which is 36 ÷ 4 = 9.

20
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 21

Example 2.10 By using the inverse operation, check if each calculation is correct.
a 450 ÷ 6 = 75 b 310 – 59 = 249
a By the inverse operation, 450 = 6 × 75. This is true and can be checked
mentally: 6 × 70 = 420, 6 × 5 = 30, 420 + 30 = 450.
b By the inverse operation, 310 = 249 + 59. This must end in 8 as 9 + 9 = 18, so it
cannot be correct.

Exercise 2D Explain why these calculations must be wrong.

a 24 × 42 = 1080 b 51 × 73 = 723 c 34.5 + 63.2 = 20.07
–––––––––––
9.7
d 360 ÷ 8 = 35 e 354 – 37 = 323

Estimate the answer to each of these problems.

a 2768 – 392 b 231 × 18 c 792 ÷ 38 d 36.7 + 23.2
––––––––––––
14.1
e 423 × 423 f 157.2 ÷ 38.2 g 135.7 – 68.2
––––––––––– h 38.9 × 61.2
–––––––––––
15.8 – 8.9 39.6 – 18.4

Amy bought 6 bottles of pop at 46p per bottle. The shopkeeper asked her for £3.16.
Without working out the correct answer, explain why this is wrong.

A first class stamp is 27p. I need eight. Will £2 be enough to pay for them? Explain
your answer clearly.

In a shop I bought a 53p comic and a £1.47 model car. The till said £54.47. Why?

Which is the best approximation for 50.7 – 39.2?

a 506 – 392 b 51 – 39 c 50 – 39 d 5.06 – 3.92

Which is the best approximation for 19.3 × 42.6?

a 20 × 40 b 19 × 42 c 19 × 40 d 20 × 42

Which is the best estimate for 54.6 ÷ 10.9?

a 500 ÷ 100 b 54 ÷ 11 c 50 ÷ 11 d 55 ÷ 11

Estimate the number the arrow is pointing to.

a b c

18 20 –2 8 –1.2 0.8

Delroy had £10. In his shopping basket he had a magazine costing £2.65, some
batteries costing £1.92 and a tape costing £4.99. Without adding up the numbers,
how could Delroy be sure he had enough to buy the goods in the basket? Explain a
6
quick way for Delroy to find out if he could afford a 45p bar of chocolate as well.

21
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 22

6 The first 15 square numbers are 1, 4, 9, 16, 25, 36, 49, 64, 81, 100, 121, 144,
169, 196 and 225. The inverse operation of squaring a number is to find its
square root. So √121 = 11. Only the square numbers have integer square roots.
Other square roots have to be estimated or found using a calculator.
For example, to find the square root of 30 use a diagram
5 6
like that on the right, to estimate that √30 ≈ 5.48. x
(A check shows that 5.48 2 = 30.03.) x2
25 36
Here is another example. Find √45. 30
The diagram shows that √45 ≈ 6.7. 6 7
(Check: 6.7 2 = 44.89) x
Use the above method to find √20, √55, √75, √110, √140, √200. x2
36 49
Check your answers with a calculator. 45

Column method for addition

and subtraction 1.2 + 5 + 0.06
= 0.23

Look at the picture. What is wrong?

You may have several ways of adding and

subtracting numbers, such as estimation
or using a number line. Here you will be
shown how to set out additions and
subtractions using the column method.
You may already have learnt about ‘lining
up the units digit’. This is not strictly 1.2
correct. What you do is ‘line up 5
the decimal points’. 0.06
0.23

Example 2.11 Work out, without using a calculator: a 3.27 + 14.8 b 12.8 – 3.45
a Write the numbers in columns, lining up the decimal points. You should fill the
gap with a zero.
3.27
+ –––––
14.80
18.07
1

Note the carry digit in the units column, because 2 + 8 = 10.

b Write the numbers in columns and fill the gap with a zero.
0 1 7 1
1⁄ 2.8⁄ 0
– –––––
3.45
9.35
Note that, because you cannot take 5 from 0, you have to borrow from the next
column. This means that 8 becomes 7 and zero becomes 10.

22
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 23

Example 2.12 Work out 3.14 + 14.5 – 8.72.

This type of problem needs to be done in two stages. First, do the addition
and then do the subtraction.
0 16 1
3.14 1⁄ 7⁄ .64
+ 14.50 – 8.72
––––– –––––
17.64 8.92

Exercise 2E By means of a drawing, show how you would use a number line to work out the
answers to these.
a 2.4 + 3.7 b 5.3 + 7.45 c 8.4 – 5.6 d 9.4 – 4.86

Repeat the calculations in Question 1 using the column method. Show all your working.

Use the column method to work out the following additions.

a 37.1 + 14.2 b 32.6 + 15.73 c 6.78 + 4.59 d 9.62 + 0.7
e 4.79 + 1.2 f 6.08 + 2.16 g 1.2 + 3.41 + 4.56
h 76.57 + 312.5 + 6.08

Use the column method to work out the following subtractions.

a 37.1 – 14.2 b 32.6 – 15.73 c 6.78 – 4.59 d 9.62 – 0.7
e 4.79 – 1.2 f 6.08 – 2.16 g 1.2 + 3.41 – 4.56
h 76.57 + 312.5 – 6.08

6 × 8 = 48 6 × 0.8 = 4.8 0.6 × 0.8 = 0.48

When these calculations are set out in columns, they look like this:
8 0.8 0.8
×––6 × –––
6.0 × ––––
0.6
48 4.8 0.48
The column method does not work when we multiply decimals.
Use a calculator to find out the rules for where the decimal point goes in
multiplication problems such as:
3 × 0.2 5 × 0.7 0.3 × 0.9 0.2 × 0.6 0.03 × 0.5

Solving problems
A bus starts at Barnsley and makes four stops before reaching
Penistone. At Barnsley 23 people get on. At Dodworth
12 people get off and 14 people get on. At Silkstone 15 people
get off and 4 people get on. At Hoylandswaine 5 people get
off and 6 people get on. At Cubley 9 people get off and 8 get
on. At Penistone the rest of the passengers get off. How many
people are on the bus?

23
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 24

When you solve problems, you need to develop a strategy: that is, a way to go about the
problem. You also have to decide which mathematical operation you need to solve it. For
example, is it addition, subtraction, multiplication or division or a combination of these?
Something else you must do is to read the question fully before starting. The answer to the
problem above is one! The driver.
Read the questions below carefully.

4 Exercise 2F

It cost six people £15 to go to the cinema. How much would it cost eight people?

Ten pencils cost £4.50. How much would seven pencils cost?

30 can be worked out as 33 – 3. Can you find two other ways of working out 30
using three equal digits?

Arrange the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 in each of these to make the problem correct.

1×1=11
a 1+1=1+1 b c 11÷1=1

A water tank holds 500 litres. How much has been used if there is 143.7 litres left in
the tank?

Strips of paper are 40 cm long. They are stuck together with a 10 cm overlap.

a How long would two strips glued together be?

b How long would four strips glued together be?

A can of coke and a Kit-Kat together cost 80p. Two cans of coke and a Kit-Kat
together cost £1.30. How much would three cans of coke and four Kit-Kats cost?

To make a number chain, start with any number.

When the number is even, divide it by 2.
When the number is odd, multiply it by 3 and add 1.
If you start with 13, the chain becomes 13, 40, 20, 10, 5, 16, 8, 4, 2, 1, 4, 2, 1, …
The chain repeats 4, 2, 1, 4, 2, 1. So, stop the chain when it gets to 1.
Start with other numbers below 20. What is the longest chain you can make before
you get to 1?

If 135 × 44 = 5940, write down, without calculating, the value of:

a 13.5 × 4.4 b 1.35 × 44 c 1.35 × 4.4 d 1350 × 440

Find four consecutive odd numbers that add up to 80.

24
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 25

Using the numbers 1, 2, 3 and 4 and any mathematical signs, make all of the
numbers from 1 to 10.
For example: 2 × 3 – 4 – 1 = 1, 4 × 2 – 3 = 5
Once you have found all the numbers up to 10, can you find totals above 10?

3 I can add and subtract whole numbers.

I can remember simple multiplication facts.
I can solve problems involving whole numbers.

4 I can use and understand place value.

I can remember multiplication facts up to 10 × 10.
I can add and subtract decimals up to two decimal places.
I can multiply and divide whole numbers by 10 or 100.

5 I can estimate answers and check if an answer is about right.

I can multiply and divide decimals by 10, 100 and 1000.
I can add and subtract using negative and positive numbers.
I can tackle mathematical problems.

1 2006 Paper 1
Add three to the number on each number line. 4
+3 +3 +3

47 1–34 –5

2 2005 Paper 2
A meal in a restaurant costs the same for each person.
For 11 people the cost is £253.
What is the total cost for 12 people?

25
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 26

4 3 2003 Paper 1
When the wind blows,
it feels colder.
Wind strength
Temperature out
of the wind (°C)
How much colder Temperature it
it feels in the
wind (°C)
feels in the wind
(°C)
The stronger the wind,
Moderate breeze 5 7 degrees colder –2
the colder it feels.
Fill in the gaps in the table. Fresh breeze –8 11 degrees colder …
The first row is done for you. Strong breeze –4 … degrees colder –20

Gale … 23 degrees colder –45

4 2003 4–6 Paper 2

The table shows how much it costs to go to a cinema. Before 6pm After 6pm
Mrs Jones (aged 35), her daughter (aged 12), her son Adult £3.20 £4.90
(aged 10) and a friend (aged 65) want to go to the
cinema. Child (14 or under) £2.50 £3.50
Senior Citizen (60 or over) £2.95 £4.90
They are not sure whether to go before 6pm or
after 6pm.
How much will they save if they go after 6pm?
Show your working.

5 2006 Paper 2
A bottle contains 250 ml of cough mixture.
One adult and one child need to take cough mixture four times a day
for five days.
Will there be enough cough mixture in the bottle?
Explain your answer.

6 2003 4–6 Paper 2

a The thermometer shows Alan’s temperature.

°C
35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42

Alan’s normal temperature is 37°C.

How many degrees higher than normal is Alan’s temperature?

b On Monday morning, Bina’s temperature was 39.2°C.

By Tuesday morning, Bina’s temperature had fallen by 1.3°C.
What was Bina’s temperature on Tuesday morning? °F
c You can measure temperature in °C or in °F.
The diagram shows how to convert °F to °C.
Subtract 32, then multiply the
The highest temperature recorded in a human was 115.7°F.
answer by 5, then divide by 9
What is this temperature in °C?
Show your working.
°C

26
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 27

CHAPTER 3 Geometry and Measures 1

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to estimate and calculate How to measure and draw lines
perimeters and areas of 2-D How to find the perimeter of a
shapes shape
How to calculate the area of a Area is measured in square
rectangle centimetres
How to draw 3-D shapes and How to draw the net of a cube
how to calculate the surface
The names of 3-D shapes such
area of a cuboid
as the cube and cuboid

Length, perimeter and area

The metric units of length in common use are: the millimetre (mm)
the centimetre (cm)
the metre (m)
the kilometre (km)
The metric units of area in common use are: the square millimetre (mm2)
the square centimetre (cm2)
the square metre (m2)
the square kilometre (km2)

Example 3.1

The length of this line is 72 mm or 7.2 cm.

Example 3.2 The side of each square on the grid represents 1 cm.
The perimeter of the L-shape = 1 + 2 + 2 + 1 + 3 + 3
= 12 cm
By counting the squares, the
area of the L-shape = 5 cm2.

27
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 28

Example 3.3 Estimate the area of the shape.

Each square on the grid has an area of 1 cm2.
Mark each square which is at least half a square
with a dot.
There are 11 dotted squares. So, an estimate for the
area of the shape is 11 cm2.

3 Exercise 3A Measure the length of each of the following lines. Give your answer in centimetres.
a
b
c
d
e

4 Find the perimeter of each of these shapes by using your ruler to measure the length
of each side.
a b c d

Copy these shapes onto 1 cm squared paper. Find the perimeter and area of each shape.
a b

c d

28
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 29

Estimate the area of each of these shapes. Each square on the grid represents one
square centimetre.
a b

Working in groups, draw the outline of each person’s hand (or foot) on 1 cm
squared paper. Estimate the area of each hand (or foot).
Make a display of all the hands (and/or feet) for your classroom.

Perimeter and area of rectangles

Length (l ) The perimeter of a rectangle is the total distance around the
shape.
Perimeter = 2 lengths + 2 widths
P = 2l + 2w Unit is mm, cm or m.
Width (w ) The area of the rectangle is the amount of space inside the
shape.
Area = length × width
A = l × w or A = lw Unit is mm2, cm2 or m2.

Example 3.4 Find the perimeter and area of each of the following.
a 6 cm b 10 cm

A
4 cm

B 12 cm
7 cm
P =2×6+2×4
= 12 + 8
= 20 cm
4 cm
A =6×4 P = 10 + 12 + 4 + 7 + 6 + 5
= 24 cm 2 = 44 cm
Total area = Area of A + Area of B
= 6 × 5 + 12 × 4
= 30 + 48
= 78 cm 2

29
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 30

4 Exercise 3B
a 5 cm
Find the perimeter of each rectangle.

b 15 cm c 8m d 24 mm

5 cm 8 cm 7m
30 mm

9m
a Find the perimeter of this room.
b Skirting board is sold in 3 m lengths.
How many lengths are needed to go 6m
around the four walls of the room?

A paving slab measures 0.8 m by 0.6 m. Find the perimeter of the slab.

Find the area of each rectangle.

a 4 cm b 12 cm c 10 m d 25 mm

4 cm 7 cm 6m 16 mm

e 15 cm f 20 cm g 9 cm h 16 cm

10 cm 8 cm 6 cm 8 cm

Find the length of each of the following rectangles.

a b c d
2
Area = 12 cm2 3 cm Area = 20 cm 2 cm
Area = 24 m2 4 m Area = 48 cm2 6 cm

Calculate the perimeter of this square. 25 cm 2

Copy and complete the table for rectangles a to f.

Length Width Perimeter Area
a 8 cm 6 cm
b 20 cm 15 cm
c 10 cm 30 cm
d 5m 22 m
e 7m 42 m2
f 10 mm 250 mm2

30
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 31

Find i the perimeter and ii the area of each of the following compound shapes.
a 4 cm b
2 cm
8 cm c 3 cm 3 cm 6
4 cm
5 cm 4 cm
3 cm 12 cm
10 cm
4 cm
4 cm

2 cm

Phil finds the area of this compound shape.

10 cm This is his working:
Area = 10 x 4 + 8 x 5
4 cm
= 40 + 40
8 cm = 80 cm2
5 cm a Explain why he is wrong.
b Calculate the correct answer.

Sandra makes a picture frame from a rectangular

piece of card for a photograph of her favourite group.
a Find the area of the photograph. 20 cm 14 cm
b Find the area of the card she uses. 24 cm
c Find the area of the border.
30 cm

1 How many rectangles can you draw with a fixed perimeter of 20

cm but each one having a different area?
2 Sheep pens
A farmer has 60 m of fence to make a rectangular
sheep pen against a wall.
Find the length and width of the pen in order to
make its area as large as possible.

3-D shapes

31
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 32

You should be able to recognise and name the following 3-D shapes or solids.

Cube Cuboid Pyramid Tetrahedron Triangular prism Cone Cylinder Sphere Hemisphere
Some of these solids can be drawn in several ways, as Example 3.5 shows.

Example 3.5 For a cube

On a square grid As a net On an isometric grid

Not easy to draw to scale. Used to make the shape Used to draw accurately.
Hidden edges can be dotted. when tabs are added. Each column of dots
must be vertical.

Exercise 3C A cuboid has six faces, eight vertices and 12 edges.

vertex
edge
face

How many faces, vertices and edges do each of the following 3-D shapes have?
a b c

Square-based pyramid Triangular prism Tetrahedron

On squared paper, draw accurate nets for each of the following cuboids.
a 4 cm b 2 cm
2 cm

3 cm
5 cm
2 cm

32
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 33

The cuboid
below is drawn on an isometric grid.
It is made from three cubes.

On a copy of the grid:

a add another cube to make an
L shape.
b add another two cubes to make
a T shape.
c add another two cubes to make
a + shape.

How many cubes are required to make this solid?

Draw other similar solids of your own on an isometric grid.

Draw each of the following cuboids accurately on an isometric grid.

a 6 cm b 2 cm c 5 cm 6
2 cm 2 cm
5 cm
1 cm

5 cm
4 cm

1 Euler’s theorem
Copy and complete the following table for seven different polyhedrons.
Ask your teacher to show you these 3-D shapes.
Solid Number of faces Number of vertices Number of edges
Cuboid
Square-based pyramid
Triangular prism
Tetrahedron
Hexagonal prism
Octahedron
Dodecahedron

Find a formula that connects the number of faces, vertices and edges.
This formula is named after Léonard Euler, a famous eighteenth-century
Swiss mathematician.

33
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 34

6 2 Pentominoes
A pentomino is a 2-D shape made from five squares that touch side to side.
Here are two examples.

a Draw on squared paper as many different pentominoes as you can.

b How many of these pentominoes are nets that make an open cube?

3 Four cubes
On an isometric grid, draw all the possible
different solids that can be made from four
cubes. Here is an example.

Surface area of cubes and cuboids

Y638MPH

The surface area of a cuboid is found by calculating the total area of its six
faces.
Height (h) Area of top and bottom faces = 2 × length × width = 2lw
Area of front and back faces = 2 × length × height = 2lh
Width (w) Area of the two sides = 2 × width × height = 2wh
Length (l ) Surface area of cuboid = S = 2lw + 2lh + 2wh

Example 3.6 Find the surface area of this cuboid.

S = (2 × 10 × 4) + (2 × 10 × 3) + (2 × 4 × 3)
3 cm
= 80 + 60 + 24
= 164 cm 2
4 cm
10 cm

34
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 35

Exercise 3D Find the surface area for each of the following cubes.
a b c d
4 cm
6 cm
8 cm 9 cm
4 cm
4 cm
6 cm
6 cm 8 cm
8 cm 9 cm
9 cm

Find the surface area of 1 cm

this unit cube.
1 cm
1 cm

Find the surface area for each of the cubes with these edge lengths.
a 2 cm b 5 cm c 10 cm d 12 cm

Find the total surface area of this 3-D shape.

2 cm
8 cm 6
2 cm

8 cm

5 cm

Find the surface area for each of the following cuboids.

a 10 cm b 3 cm c 5 cm d 2 cm
3 cm
4 cm
5 cm
8 cm
12 cm
6 cm 15 cm
2 cm

Find the surface area of the outside

3m
of this open water tank.
(A cuboid without a top.)
1m
8m

35
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:56 Page 36

Cubes to cuboids
You will need 12 unit cubes for this activity.
All 12 cubes are arranged to form a cuboid.
How many different cuboids can you make?
Which one has the greatest surface area?

4 I can draw and measure straight lines.

I can find the perimeter of a 2-D shape.
I can find the area of a 2-D shape by counting squares.

I can find the area of a rectangle using the formula Area = length × width.
5 I can draw 3-D shapes on an isometric grid.
I can draw the net of a cuboid.

6 I can find the surface area of a cuboid.

1 2000 Paper 2

4 The shaded rectangle has an area of 4 cm2

and a perimeter of 10 cm.

a Look at the cross-shape.

The cross-shape has an area of … cm2

and a perimeter of … cm.

36
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 37

b Draw a shape with an area of 6 cm2.

c What is the perimeter of your shape? 4

2 2001 Paper 2 1 cm 2 cm 3 cm
Alika has a box of square tiles.
1 cm
The tiles are three different sizes. 2 cm
1 by 1 tile 3 cm

2 by 2 tile

She also has a mat that is 6 cm by 6 cm.

3 by 3 tile
36 of the 1 by 1 tiles will cover the mat.

6 cm
a How many of the 2 by 2 tiles
will cover the mat?

b How many of the 3 by 3 tiles

will cover the mat? 6 cm

c Alika glues three tiles on her mat like this.

Complete the gaps below.

She could cover the rest of the mat by

using another two 3 by 3 tiles and
another … 1 by 1 tiles.

She could cover the rest of the mat by

using another two 2 by 2 tiles and
another … 1 by 1 tiles.

37
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 38

3 2006 4–6 Paper 1

I have a square piece of paper.
The diagram shows information about this square, labelled A. A 8 cm

8 cm
I fold square A in half to make rectangle B.
B

Then I fold rectangle B in half to make square C.

C

Complete the table below to show the area and perimeter of each shape.

Area Perimeter
Square A cm2 cm
Rectangle B cm2 cm
Square C cm2 cm

4 2000 Paper 2
View A View B
I make a model with 6 cubes.
The drawings show my model from
different views.

a I join one more cube to my model. View A View B

The drawing from view A
shows where I join the cube.
Complete the drawing
from view B.

b Then I move the cube to a different

position. View A View B

Complete the drawing

from view B.

38
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 39

5 2004 4–6 Paper 2

Look at this shape made from six cubes.
Four cubes are white.
Two cubes are grey.

a Part of the shape is rotated through 90° to make the shape below.
Copy this and shade the faces that are grey.

b After another rotation of 90°, the shape is a cuboid.

Draw this cuboid on a grid like the one below.

39
FM Ch 12 Smoothies PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:55 Page 152

Functional Maths

Smoothie bar
Fruity Surprise Tropical Fruit
£2.50
250 g tropical fruit
Small 300 ml 100 g mango 100 ml yoghurt
Medium 400 ml £3 50 g strawberries 85 g raspberries
Large 600 ml £4 75 g bananas –12 lime juice
250 ml orange juice 1 tsp honey
1 Work out the
recipe for a small
Fruity Surprise.
To make 2
a small Work out the
smoothie: recipe for a large
e
Use 75% of th Chocolate. 3 How much milk would be
ingredients in
needed to make 50 small
the medium Breakfast Boost Smoothies?
recipe. Give the answer in litres.

To make
a large
smoothie:
Just add
200 ml of fru
it
juice or milk.

8
6 What proportion If I buy one smoothie
of each size, how much will
of a medium Fruity I save using the offer?
Surprise is orange 7 I am buying 15 small
juice?
smoothies. They are Tropical
Fruit and Breakfast Boost in
the ratio 2 : 3. How many of
each type am I buying?

152
FM Ch 12 Smoothies PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:55 Page 153

Recipes are for medium smoothies

Buy any
two smoothie
Breakfast Boost Chocolate get the chea s and
100 g strawberries 100 g banana for half prpicer one
1 banana 50 g chocolate spread e!
150 ml milk 200 ml cranberry juice

4 Work out how many

medium Breakfast Boosts can be
made with 2 kg of strawberries, 1 litre
of milk and 20 bananas. What extras
would be needed to make 20
Breakfast Boosts?

5
How much tropical fruit
would be needed to make 30 medium
Tropical Fruit Smoothies? Give the
answer in kilograms.

10
I would like 3 small
Tropical Fruits and 1 large
9 Chocolate. Using the offer,
I have £5. Using the
offer, how much change will I how much will they cost?
have if I buy a medium and a
small smoothie?

153
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:02 Page 154

CHAPTER 13 Algebra 4
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to solve different types of Understand the conventions of
problem using algebra algebra
How to use letters in place of
numbers
How to solve equations

Solving ‘brick wall’ problems

Example 13.1 The numbers in two ‘bricks’ which are
side by side (adjacent) are added together. 21
The answer is written in the ‘brick’ above.
Find the number missing from the ‘brick’
in the bottom layer. 8 3

21
Let the missing number be x. This gives:
x+8 x+3
Adding the terms in adjacent ‘bricks’ 8 x 3
gives:
(x + 8) + (x + 3) = 21
x + 8 + x + 3 = 21
2x + 11 = 21
2x + 11 – 11 = 21 – 11 (Take 11 from both sides)
2x = 10
2x
–– = 10
–– (Divide both sides by 2)
2 2
x=5
So, the missing number is 5.

Exercise 13A Find the unknown number x in each of these ‘brick wall’ problems.

4 x x x

4 7 9 5 9 8 –2 3 –6

21 26 26

4 x 7 3 x 11 8 x 4

154
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:02 Page 155

29 24 22

3 x 8 x 5 9 x 7 x

22 19 21
6
x 3 x x 5 2x 2x x 3x

1 Find the value of x in each of these:

a 27 b 31 c 45

2x x 7 x+4 x 3 x+5 x x+4

d 39

x + 1 x – 1 2x – 1 x

2 Make up some of your own ‘brick wall’ problems.

Solving square-and-circle problems

The number in each square is the sum of the numbers in the two circles on either side of
the square.

Example 13.2 The values of A, B, C and D are to be positive.

Can you work out all possible values of A 10 B
A, B, C and D?
First, write down four equations from this diagram:
A + B = 10
11 12
B + C = 12
C + D = 13
D + A = 11
There may be more than one solution to this D 13 C
problem. So, continue by asking yourself:
‘What if I let A = 1?’
A = 1 gives B = 10 – 1 = 9
B = 9 gives C = 12 – 9 = 3
C = 3 gives D = 13 – 3 = 10
D = 10 gives A = 11 – 10 = 1 , which is the starting value, A = 1

155
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:02 Page 156

Example 13.2 This gives one of a series of possible solutions to this problem. So, set up a table to
continued calculate and display these solutions, which are called the solution set.

A B C D A (check)
1 9 3 10 1
2 8 4 9 2
3 7 5 8 3
4 6 6 7 4
5 5 7 6 5
6 4 8 5 6
7 3 9 4 7
8 2 10 3 8
9 1 11 2 9

Note: The last column is used as a check.

Such a table allows you to look at all possible solutions. If all the answers had to be
different, you would choose only those four that were different.

Example 13.3 Again, the values of A, B, C and D are to

be positive. A 9 B

Starting with A = 1, gives B = 8, which makes

C negative. Since you are looking only for
positive solutions, you cannot have A = 1. 12 7
So try A = 2. This will give C = 0, so you
cannot use A = 2.
D 10 C
This will lead to the following solution set.

A B C D A (check)
3 6 1 9 3
4 5 2 8 4
5 4 3 7 5
6 3 4 6 6
7 2 5 5 7
8 1 6 4 8

Some of these would have to be rejected if all the solutions had to be different.

156
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:02 Page 157

Exercise 13B Find the solution set to each of the following square and circle puzzles for the value
of A stated.
a b c
A 7 B A 8 B A 6 B

9 8 11 7 9 4

D 10 C D 10 C D 7 C

A=2 A=3 A=5

a
Find the solution set to each of the following square-and-circle puzzles.
All solutions must use positive numbers.
b c
6
A 9 B A 10 B A 13 B

7 11 8 7 6 14

D 9 C D 5 C D 7 C

1 Triangular square and circle problems only have one solution.

Find the values that fit in the circle for these triangles.
Hint: Start with a value for A then work out B and C and make sure A works.
a b c
A A A

11 8 8 13 33 28

C 13 B C 9 B C 35 B

2 Make up some triangular square and circle problems. Try them out on
your friends.
3 What is the connection between the sum of the squares and the sum of
the circles?

157
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:02 Page 158

Triangle-and-circle problems
Look at the diagram on the right. The number in each
A
box is the sum of the two numbers in the circles on each
side of the box.
The values of A, B and C are positive integers and no
two are the same. What are they? 13 14
The values of A, B and C can be found by using
algebraic equations, as shown below.
Three equations can be written down from the diagram. C 11 B
They are:
A + B = 14 (1)
B + C = 11 (2)
A + C = 13 (3)
First, add together equation (1) and equation (2). This gives:
A + B + B + C = 14 + 11
A + C + 2B = 25
We know that A + C = 13, so:
13 + 2B = 25
2B = 12
B =6
If B = 6, then A = 8 and C = 5.
Check that these values work.

Exercise 13C
6 a
Use algebra to solve each of these triangle-and-circle problems. All the solutions are
positive integers.
b c
A A A

14 15 16 25 23 12

C 13 B C 21 B C 33 B

158
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:02 Page 159

Use algebra to solve each of these triangle-and-circle problems. The solutions are

a
positive and negative integers.
b c
6
A A A

2 4 11 4 –11 3

C 8 B C 1 B C –2 B

Use algebra to solve this triangle-and-circle problem.

The solutions are positive and negative numbers. A

5 –1

C 1 B

5 I can solve a simple problem using simple algebra such as finding

the value of a in the given brick wall problem.
17
8
a 3 5

I can solve a mathematical problem such as the triangle and circle A

problem on the right using trial and improvement.

15 11

C 10 B

6 I can use algebra to set up and solve mathematical problems,

e.g. 4 friends each have m sweets. Ann eats 5, Ben eats 3, Chas
eats 4 and Denny eats 2. They then have 46 sweets left between
them. What is the value of m?

159
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:02 Page 160

1 2000 Paper 1
4 Here is a number triangle. 2 2
+
5
= 7
5 7

3 8 5

You will find the number in a square by adding the numbers in the two circles on either side of it.
Look at the following number triangles.
Copy the triangles and fill in the missing numbers.

a b
33

203 138

20 88 68 126 187

2 2004 4–6 Paper 2 O

O
P
P
E
E
N
N
T WT WT WT WT WT WT WT WT WT WT WT W

C C CE C EC C EC C C C EC C
P E
O N
P E E E
O N
I have some 5p coins and some 2p coins. .... E
........
PE
V ........
O
O
P
2
P
2
E
E

N
N
.........................................................F......

...N .C..E...C.NE..C.N.E.C..NE.C..N.E.C.NE.C..N....CNE..C.NEC. E

P
.... 2 E
N
E

PE O
.............. ......... ............E.................
I

E
V........... P
. .E 2 E
N

P
. ....P...E. N
.. . . . .F. . . ..F .. . ..F. ....F I

O
.. ... .F. I F...I ..I F..I. . I F..I. . I F..I .

I can use some of my coins to make 27p. ..V E

... E
5 2P E
N
E E E

. .
V .... .... O
5
.........
.... .... ..... ....

.. E.....
... PE
.. O
P
2 E
N
..V.. P E.
5
.
... .........
E
V...........
. ..
...
E
........
V ...
P
...E. 5 O 2P E
N
.. .
. E....P..E..
... .......
..
.V..E....P..E.. 5 O 2
P E
N
............ 5 2
E E

..V.. P E.
5 2
a The table shows different ways to make 27p from ... .........
E
V
..........
.............. 5
5 2
............ 5 2
5p and 2p coins.
.. .. ....

5p coins 2p coins
The first way is done for you. What are the numbers
missing from the second and third ways?

Ways to make 27p

Use five 5p coins and one 2p coin.

Use three 5p coins and

1 2p coins.
Use one 5p coin and
1 2p coins.

b I cannot make 27p from 5p coins and 2p coins using an even number of 5p coins.
Explain why not.

160
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:02 Page 161

3 2005 4–6 Paper 2

Arrange all the numbers 1, 2, 3, 4 and 5 into two groups so that doubling the sum of the first
group gives the sum of the second group.
4
There are three different ways the numbers can be arranged. The first one is done for you.
Write down the other two ways.

First group Second group

5 1,2,3,4

161
FM Ch 13 Child Trust Fund PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:57 Page 162

Functional Maths

Child trust fund

Use the information in the child trust funds key to answer the following questions

Child trust fund

Children born on or after 1 September 2002 get a £250 voucher from the
government to start their child trust fund account.
They get a further payment of £250 from the government on their seventh
birthday.
If the household income is below the Child Tax Credit income threshold they
get an additional £250 with each payment.
Parents, relatives and friends can contribute a maximum of £1200 a year
between them to the fund.
All interest or earnings on the account is tax-free.
The child (and no-one else) can withdraw the money in the fund when they are
18.
Money cannot be taken out of the account until the child is 18.

Average annual growth 3%

Average annual investment
0 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200

Potential 1 258 408 558 708 858 1008 1158 1308 1458
amount in 7 565 1714 2864 4013 5162 6312 7461 8611 9760
account
after years 13 675 3017 5360 7703 10045 12388 14731 17073 19416
shown 18 782 4294 7806 11319 14831 18343 21855 25367 28879

Average annual growth 6%

Average annual investment
0 150 300 450 600 750 900 1050 1200

Potential 1 265 415 565 715 865 1015 1165 1315 1465
amount in 7 641 1900 3159 4418 5677 6936 8195 9454 10714
account
after years 13 909 3741 6574 9406 12238 15071 17903 20735 23568
shown 18 1217 5852 10488 15124 19760 24396 29032 33668 38303

162
FM Ch 13 Child Trust Fund PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:57 Page 163

1 a What is 10% of £250?

b What is 5% of £250?
c What is 3% of £250?
d What is 6% of £250?

2 Would children starting school at the

age of 5 in September 2008 have a
child trust fund? Explain your answer.

3 If the parents of a child decided to invest £500 per year

in the trust fund, what is the maximum amount the
grandparents could invest?

4 If the average annual growth rate is 3% and an average

of £300 is invested each year, how much would be in the
account when the child is 18 years old?

5 If a child lived in a household where the income was

below the Child Tax Credit limit and no extra investment
was made into the fund, explain why there would be
approximately £1564 in the trust fund after 18 years.

6 A family has an income below the Child Tax Credit limit. They
invest an average of £150 in the child trust fund at an average
growth rate of 3%. Approximately how much will be in the
account when the child is 18?

7 Look at the amounts in the accounts after 1 year.

a By how much do the amounts increase for both the average
growth rates of 3% and 6%?
b How much would be in the account after 1 year if the average
growth rate is 3% and the amount invested is £75?
c How much would be in the account after 1 year if the average
growth rate is 6% and the amount invested is £675?

8 At an average growth rate of 3%, the amount in the trust fund at 18 for
an average investment of £450 is £11 000 to the nearest £1000 and for
an average annual investment of £600 is £15 000 to the nearest £1000.
Approximately how much would be in the fund at 18 for an average
growth of 3% and an annual investment of £525?

163
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 164

CHAPTER 14 Geometry and Measures 4

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to use line and rotation Be able to recognise shapes
symmetry that have reflective symmetry
How to reflect shapes in a Be able to recognise shapes
mirror line that have been translated
How to rotate shapes about a
point
How to translate shapes

Line symmetry
A 2-D shape has a line of symmetry when one half of the shape fits exactly over the other
half when the shape is folded along that line.
A mirror or tracing paper can be used to check whether a shape has a line of symmetry.
Some shapes have no lines of symmetry while others have more than one.
A line of symmetry is also called a mirror line or an axis of reflection.

Example 14.1 This T-shape has one line of symmetry, as shown.

Put a mirror on the line of symmetry and check that the
image in the mirror is half the T-shape.
Next, trace the T-shape and fold the tracing along the
line of symmetry to check that both halves of the shape
fit exactly over each other.

Example 14.2 This cross has four lines of symmetry, as shown.

Check that each line drawn here is a line of symmetry.
Use either a mirror or tracing paper.

Example 14.3 This L-shape has no lines of symmetry.

164
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 165

Exercise 14A Copy each of these shapes and draw its lines of symmetry. Write below each shape
the number of lines of symmetry it has. 3
a b c d e f

Isosceles Equilateral Square Rectangle Parallelogram Kite

triangle triangle

Write down the number of lines of symmetry for each of the following shapes.
a b c d 4
e f g h

Write down the number of lines of symmetry for each of these road signs.
a b c d e f

40

1 Symmetry squares
Two squares can be put together
along their sides to make a shape that
has line symmetry. One symmetrical
arrangement for two squares
Three squares can be put together
along their sides to make 2 different
shapes that have line symmetry.
Investigate how many different
symmetrical arrangements there are
for four squares. What about five
Two symmetrical arrangement
squares?
for three squares
2 Sports logo
Design a logo for a new sports and leisure centre that is due to open
soon. Your logo should have four lines of symmetry.

165
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 166

Rotational symmetry
A 2-D shape has rotational symmetry when it can be rotated about a point to look
exactly the same in a new position.
The order of rotational symmetry is the number of different positions in which the shape
looks the same when it is rotated about the point through one complete turn (360°).
A shape has no rotational symmetry when it has to be rotated through one complete turn
to look exactly the same. So it is said to have rotational symmetry of order 1.
To find the order of rotational symmetry of a shape, use tracing paper.
● First, trace the shape.
● Then rotate the tracing paper until the tracing again fits exactly over the shape.
● Count the number of times that the tracing fits exactly over the shape until you return
to the starting position.
● The number of times that the tracing fits is the order of rotational symmetry.

Example 14.4 This shape has rotational symmetry of order 3.

Example 14.5 This shape has rotational symmetry of order 4.

Example 14.6 This shape has no rotational symmetry.

Therefore, it has rotational symmetry of order 1.

Exercise 14B Copy each of these capital letters and write below its order of rotational symmetry.
a b c d e f

Write down the order of rotational symmetry for each of the shapes below.
a b c d e f

166
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 167

Copy and complete the table for each of the following regular polygons.
a b c d e

Shape Number of lines Order of rotational

of symmetry symmetry
a Equilateral triangle
b Square
c Regular pentagon
d Regular hexagon
e Regular octagon

What do you notice?

a Make eight copies of this shape on square dotty paper.

b Cut them out and arrange them to make a pattern with
rotational symmetry of order 8.
c Design your own pattern which has rotational
symmetry of order 8.

Reflections

The picture shows an L-shape reflected in a mirror.

You can draw the picture without the mirror, as follows:

Image Object

Mirror line

167
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 168

The object is reflected in the mirror line to give the image. The mirror line becomes a line
of symmetry. So, if the paper is folded along the mirror line, the object will fit exactly over
the image. The image is the same distance from the mirror line as the object.
A reflection is an example of a transformation. A transformation is a way of changing the
position or the size of a shape.

Example 14.7 Reflect this shape in the given

mirror line.
Notice that the image is the
same size as the object, and that
the mirror line becomes a line of
symmetry.

Example 14.8 Triangle A’B’C’ is the reflection of triangle ABC in the

given mirror line. A’ A
When we change the position of a shape, we
sometimes use the term map. Here we could write:
ABC is mapped onto A’B’C’ by a reflection in
the mirror line.
Notice that the line joining A to A’ is perpendicular to
the mirror line. This is true for all corresponding C’ B’ B C
points on the object and the image. Also, all
corresponding points on the object and image are at
the same perpendicular distance from the mirror line.

Example 14.9 Reflect this rectangle

in the mirror line
shown.
Use tracing paper to
check the reflection.

4 Exercise 14C

a
Copy each of these diagrams onto squared paper and draw its reflection in the given
mirror line.
b c d

168
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 169

Copy each of these shapes onto squared paper and draw its reflection in the given
mirror line.
a b c d
4

The points A(1, 2), B(2, 5), C(4, 4) and y

D(6,1) are shown on the grid.
6
a Copy the grid onto squared paper and plot the
5
points A, B, C and D. Draw the mirror line. B
b Reflect the points in the mirror line and label 4
C
them A’, B’, C’ and D’. 3
c Write down the coordinates of the image
points. 2
A
d The point E(12, 6) is mapped onto E’ by a 1
reflection in the mirror line. What are the D
x
coordinates of E’? 0 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 a Copy the diagram onto squared

paper and reflect the triangle in
4
the series of parallel mirrors.
b Make up your own patterns using
a series of parallel mirrors.

2 a Copy the grid onto squared paper and draw y

the triangle ABC. Write down the coordinates
of A, B and C. 5
A
b Reflect the triangle in the x-axis. Label the 4
vertices of the image A’, B’ and C’. What are the
3
coordinates of A’, B’ and C’?
c Reflect triangle A’B’C’ in the y-axis. Label the 2
vertices of this image A”, B” and C”. What are 1 B C
the coordinates of A”, B” and C”?
x
d Reflect triangle A”B”C” in the x-axis. Label the –5 –4 –3 –2 –1 O 1 2 3 4 5
–1
vertices A”’, B”’ and C”’. What are the
coordinates of A”’B”’C”’? –2
e Describe the reflection that maps triangle –3
A”’B”’C”’ onto triangle ABC.
–4
3 Use ICT software, such as Logo, to reflect shapes in
mirror lines. –5

169
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 170

Rotations
Another type of transformation in geometry is rotation.
To describe the rotation of a 2-D shape, three facts must be known:
● Centre of rotation – the point about which the shape rotates.
● Angle of rotation – this is usually 90° ( 41 turn), 180° ( 12 turn) or 270° ( 34 turn).
● Direction of rotation – clockwise or anticlockwise.
When you rotate a shape, it is a good idea to use tracing paper.
As with reflections, the original shape is called the object, and the rotated shape is called
the image.

Example 14.10 The flag is rotated through 90° clockwise about

the point X.
Notice that this is the same as rotating the flag Object
through 270° anticlockwise about the point X.

Image

Example 14.11 This right-angled triangle is rotated through 180° clockwise about the point X.
Notice that this triangle can
be rotated either clockwise or
anticlockwise when turning
through 180°.

Example 14.12 ABC has been mapped onto A

A’B’C’ by a rotation of 90°
anticlockwise about the point X.

B’
C B
A’

C’

Exercise 14D Copy each of the flags below and draw the image after each one has been rotated
about the point marked X through the angle indicated. Use tracing paper to help.
a b c d

90° anticlockwise 180° clockwise 90° clockwise 270° anticlockwise

170
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 171

Copy each of the shapes below onto a square grid. Draw the image after each one
has been rotated about the point marked X through the angle indicated. Use tracing
paper to help.
a b c d

180° clockwise 90° anticlockwise 180° anticlockwise 90° clockwise

a Rotate the rectangle ABCD through 90° y

clockwise about the point (1,2) to give the
image A’B’C’D’.
6
A B
6
b Write down the coordinates of A’, B’, C’ 5
and D’. 4
c Which coordinate point remains fixed
3
throughout the rotation?
d What rotation will map the rectangle 2
D C
A’B’C’D’ onto the rectangle ABCD? 1
x
0 1 2 3 4 5 6

1 Inverse rotations
The inverse of a rotation is that rotation required to map the image back
onto the object, using the same centre of rotation. Investigate inverse
rotations by drawing your own shapes and using different rotations.
Write down any properties you discover about inverse rotations.
2 Use ICT software, such as Logo, to rotate shapes about different centres
of rotation.

Translations
A translation is the movement of a 2-D shape from one position to another without
reflecting it or rotating it.
The distance and direction of the translation are given by the number of unit squares
moved to the right or left, followed by the number of unit squares moved up or down.
As with reflections and rotations, the original shape is called the object, and the
translated shape is called the image.

171
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 172

Example 14.13 Triangle A has been mapped onto triangle B by a

translation 3 units right, followed by 2 units up.
Points on triangle A are mapped by the same
translation onto triangle B, as shown by the arrows. B
When an object is translated onto its image, every
point on the object moves the same distance.

Example 14.14 The rectangle ABCD has been mapped onto

rectangle A’B’C’D’ by a translation 3 units left, A B
followed by 3 units down.

D C

A’ B’

D’ C’

Exercise 14E Describe each of the following translations:

a from A to B
b from A to C A B
c from A to D
d from A to E
C
e from B to D
f from C to E
E
g from D to E D
h from E to A

6 Copy the triangle ABC onto squared y

paper. Label it P.
5
a Write down the coordinates of the A
vertices of triangle P. 4

b Translate triangle P 6 units left and 3

2 units down. Label the new
2 C B
triangle Q.
c Write down the coordinates of the 1
vertices of triangle Q. x
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 O 1 2 3 4 5
d Translate triangle Q 5 units right –1
and 4 units down. Label the new –2
triangle R.
–3
e Write down the coordinates of the
vertices of triangle R. –4
f Describe the translation which –5
maps triangle R onto triangle P.

172
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 173

Use squared dotty paper or a pin-board for this investigation. 6

a How many different translations of the triangle are possible on this 3 by
3 grid?
b How many different translations of this triangle are possible on a 4 by 4
grid?
c Investigate the number of translations that are possible on any size grid.

4 I can reflect simple shapes in a mirror line.

5 I can find the order of rotational symmetry of a 2-D shape.

I can rotate 2-D shapes about a centre of rotation.
I can translate 2-D shapes.

1 1998 Paper 1
These patterns are from Islamic designs. Write down the number of lines of symmetry for each pattern.
a b c
4

173
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 174

2 2006 4–6 Paper 2

4 The square grid shows a rectangle reflected in two mirror

lines.

mirror line

mirror line

On a copy of the square grid below, show the triangle

reflected in the two mirror lines.

mirror line

mirror line

3 2005 4–6 Paper 1

The shapes below are drawn on square grids.
The diagrams show a rectangle that is rotated, then rotated again,
The centre of rotation is marked •.

Rotate Rotate another

90° clockwise 90° clockwise

174
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:03 Page 175

Copy and complete the diagrams below to show the triangle when it is rotated, then rotated again.
The centre of rotation is marked •.

Rotate Rotate another

90° clockwise 90° clockwise

4 2003 4–6 Paper 1

I have a square grid and two rectangles.

grid two rectangles

I make a pattern with the grid and the two

rectangles:
The pattern has no lines of symmetry.

a Put both rectangles on the grid to make

a pattern with two lines of symmetry.
You must shade the rectangles.

b Put both rectangles on the grid to make

a pattern with only one line of symmetry.
You must shade the rectangles.

c Put both rectangles on the grid to make a

pattern with rotation symmetry of order 2.
You must shade the rectangles.

175
FM Ch 14 Landmark PB 7.2 14/2/08 15:19 Page 176

Functional Maths

Landmark spotting

Look at the symmetry

of these famous
landmarks

1 How many lines of

symmetry does each
picture have?
Draw sketches to show
the lines of symmetry.

2 The picture for some of the buildings will have

a different number of lines if the picture was
taken directly from above. We call this the
aerial view.
How many lines of symmetry would a picture
of the Eiffel Tower have from an aerial view?
Draw a sketch to show the lines of symmetry.
Explain why it may not be possible to do this
for the aerial views of the other buildings.

3 The window on the picture of Notre Dame

Cathedral also has rotational symmetry.
Design a window of your own that has
rotational symmetry.

176
FM Ch 14 Landmark PB 7.2 14/2/08 15:19 Page 177

4 Look at the buildings in the town where you live.

Do any of them or parts of them have symmetry?
Look particularly at churches, Georgian buildings
and modern office blocks.
Make sketches of anything you find and
comment on the symmetry.

5 Can you find any other famous landmarks

that have symmetry? Use the Internet to help.
Make a list of all the buildings that you find.

177
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 178

CHAPTER 15 Statistics 3
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to draw a pie chart where How to draw pie charts
the data is given as How to calculate the mean of a
percentages set of data
How to compare distributions How to find the range of a set of
using range and mean data

Pie charts
Sometimes we are presented with pie charts showing percentages. The simplest of these
are split into 10 sections each section representing 10%, like the ones shown below.

Example 15.1 The pie chart shows the favourite drink of some Year 7 pupils.
We see that: Tea occupies 1 sector, hence 10% have tea as
Tea
their favourite.
Milk
Milk occupies 3 sectors, hence 30% have milk as Coffee
their favourite.
Coke occupies 4 sectors, hence 40% have coke Coke
as their favourite.
Coffee occupies 2 sectors, hence 20% have
coffee as their favourite.

Example 15.2 The two pie charts show how late the trains of Britain
Britain and Spain are. Use them to compare More than
the punctuality of trains in both countries. 10 min
From the pie charts we can create tables
interpreting the data, remembering that each On
5–10
division represents 10% (hence half a sector min time
will be 5%).
The tables we can create are: Up to 5 min Spain
5–10 min
Lateness: Britain Percentage Up to 5 min
On time 55
Up to 5 minutes late 10
Between 5 and 10 minutes late 15
More than 10 minutes late 20
On time
Lateness: Spain Percentage
On time 85
Up to 5 minutes late 10
Between 5 and 10 minutes late 5
More than 10 minutes late 0

178
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 179

We can see that:

● a higher percentage of trains in Spain are on time.
● the same percentage of trains are up to 5 minutes late in both countries.
● a higher percentage of trains in Britain are over 5 minutes late.

Exercise 15A For each of the pie charts, start with a copy of the circle that is divided into ten sectors.
Remember to label your pie chart.

The pie chart on the right shows the percentage of cars Black Red
in a car park of different colours.
What percentage of the cars were:
Yellow
a red b blue c green
d yellow e black? Green
Blue

The pie chart on the right shows the percentage of pets of

pupils in a Y7 group.
Gerbils Dogs
What percentage of the pets were:
a dogs b cats c birds
Fish
d fish e gerbils? Cats
Birds

The pie chart on the right shows the percentage of various

school subjects that pupils chose as their favourite. P.E.
History
What percentage of the pupils said their favourite Maths
subject was: Geography

a maths b English c geography

English
d history e PE?

The pie chart on the right shows the percentage Neighbours

of various television soap operas that pupils
Hollyoaks
chose as their favourite.
What percentage of the pupils said their Coronation EastEnders
favourite soap opera was: Street
a EastEnders b Hollyoaks
c Coronation Street d Neighbours?

The pie chart on the right shows the percentage of various

age groups living in Rotherham. >60 <16

What percentage of the people in Rotherham were aged:

41–60 16–25
a under 16 b 16–25 c 26–40
d 41–60 e over 60? 26–40

179
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 180

The pie chart on the right shows the percentage of various

age groups living in Eastbourne. <16
>60
What percentage of the people in Eastbourne were aged: 16–25

a under 16 b 16–25 c 26–40

41–60 26–40
d 41–60 e over 60?

The chart on the right is the distribution of ages in an

Indian village. What percentage of the people in the Indian
Under 16–25
village were aged:
16
a under 16 b 16–25 c 26–40 Over 60

d 41–60 e over 60? 41–60

26–40

Use the information in questions 5, 6 and 7 to decide which of the following

statements are TRUE or FALSE:
a There is a greater percentage of under 16s in Rotherham than Eastbourne.
b There is a greater percentage of over 60s in Rotherham than Eastbourne.
c There is a greater percentage of people aged 16–40 in Rotherham than Eastbourne.
d There is an equal percentage of people aged 41–60 in Rotherham and Eastbourne.
e There is a smaller percentage of under 16s in Rotherham than the village
in India.
f There is a smaller percentage of over 60s in the village in India than Eastbourne.
g There is a smaller percentage of people aged 41–60 in the village in India than
Eastbourne.

Find data that is given as percentages. For example, the table of constituents
on the side of a cereal packet.
Draw pie charts to compare these and display them as a poster.

Comparing data

Example 15.3 You are organising a ten-pin bowling match. You have one team place to fill.
These are the last five scores for Carol and Doris.
Carol 122 131 114 162 146
Doris 210 91 135 99 151
Who would you pick to be in the team and why?
The mean for Carol is 135 and the range is 48.
The mean for Doris is 137.2 and the range is 119.
You could pick Doris as she has the greater mean, or you could pick Carol as she is
more consistent.

180
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 181

Example 15.4 Your teacher thinks that the girls in the class are absent more often than the boys.
There are 10 boys in your class. Their days absent over last term were:
5 0 3 4 6 3 0 8 6 5
There are 12 girls in the class. Their days absent over last term were:
2 1 0 0 5 3 1 2 3 50 2 3
Is your teacher correct? Explain your answer.
The mean for the boys is 4 and the range is 8.
The mean for the girls is 6 and the range is 50.
It looks as though your teacher is correct. But if you take out the girl who was absent
50 times because she was in hospital, the mean for the girls becomes 2 and the
range 5. In that case, your teacher would be wrong.

Exercise 15B

You have to choose someone to play darts for your team. You ask Bill and Ben to
throw ten times each. These are their scores.
Ryan 32 16 25 65 12 24 63 121 31 11
Ali 43 56 40 31 37 49 49 30 31 24
a Work out the mean for Ryan. b Work out the range for Ryan.
c Work out the mean for Ali. d Work out the range for Ali.
e Who would you choose and why?

You have to catch a bus regularly. You can catch bus A or bus B. On the last ten times
you caught these buses. You noted down, in minutes, how late they were.
Bus A 1 2 4 12 1 3 5 6 2 9
Bus B 6 5 5 6 2 4 4 5 6 7
a Work out the mean for bus A. b Work out the range for bus A.
c Work out the mean for bus B. d Work out the range for bus B.

Each day at break I buy a bag of biscuits from the school canteen. I can buy them
from canteen A or canteen B. I made a note of how many biscuits were in each bag I
got from each canteen.
Canteen A 12 11 14 10 13 12 9 12 15 12
Canteen B 5 18 13 15 10 15 17 8 11 13
a Work out the mean for Canteen A. b Work out the range for Canteen A.
c Work out the mean for Canteen B. d Work out the range for Canteen B.

You have to choose someone for a quiz team. The last ten quiz scores (out of 20) for
Bryan and Ryan are:
Bryan 1 19 2 12 20 13 2 6 5 10
Adeel 8 7 9 12 13 8 7 11 7 8
a Work out the mean for Bryan. b Work out the range for Bryan.
c Work out the mean for Adeel. d Work out the range for Adeel.
e Who would you choose for the quiz team and why?

181
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 182

Work in pairs.
a Measure the length of the fingers on each hand with a ruler as accurately
as you can.
b Repeat this for both of you.
c Calculate the mean and the range of the lengths of the fingers for each of you.
d Comment on your results.
e Try to compare your results with others in your class.
f Compare the results for boys and girls. What do you notice?

Statistical surveys
You are about to carry out some statistical surveys and create charts to display your results.
Your data may be obtained in one of the following ways:
● A survey of a sample of people. Your sample size should be more than 30. To collect
data from your chosen sample, you will need to use a data collection sheet or a
questionnaire.
● Carry out experiments. You will need to keep a record of your observations on a data
collection sheet.

Exercise 15C a Find a sample of 30 people or more and ask them the following question,
keeping a tally of the answers.
Approximately how many hours do you watch TV over a typical weekend?

Time (hours) Tally Frequency

2 hours or less
Over 2 but less than 4 hours
Between 4 and 8 hours
Over 8 hours

b Create a chart illustrating your collected data.

For this question, change some of the named sports if you wish.
a Find a sample of 30 Year 7 boys and ask them the following question, keeping a
tally of the answers.
Which of the following sports do you play outside school?

Sport Tally Frequency

Football
Cricket
Tennis
Badminton
Something else

182
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 183

b Now find a sample of 30 Year 7 girls and ask them the same question, keeping a
tally of the results.
c Create charts illustrating your data and also illustrating any differences between
the two groups.

For this question, change some of the bands if you wish.

a Find a sample of 30 Year 7 pupils and ask them the following question, keeping
a tally of the answers
Which of the following bands would you most want to go and listen to at a
concert?

Band Tally Frequency

Red Hot Chili Peppers
Mika
Ordinary Boys
Kaiser Chiefs
Arctic Monkeys

b Create charts illustrating your data.

a Ask the following sequence of questions to 30 people or more:

i Before this year, have you normally gone abroad for your holiday? Yes/No
ii Are you intending to go abroad on holiday this year? Yes/No
b Use your results to complete the following two way table:

Going abroad Not going abroad

this year this year
Normally go abroad
Do not normally go abroad

c From your results, is it true to say ‘More people are taking holidays abroad this
year’?

By choosing a suitable sample of people,

investigate the young woman’s statement. Taller people have a larger
head circumference.

Probabilities from two way tables

In the media you will often see two way tables that show information. From these tables
we can determine probabilities of events.

183
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 184

Example 15.5 Vicky did a survey of the time spent on homework the previous night of all the
pupils in her class. This table shows her results:

Number of boys Number of girls

under 1 hour 13 9
1 hour or more 3 5

What is the probability that at random, we select from this class a pupil who:
a is a boy who spent an hour or more on his homework?
b is someone who spent under an hour on their homework?

Each person in the class can only be in one section of the table, so by adding up all
the four sections we can tell how many are in the class altogether. This is 13 + 9 + 3
+ 5, which equals 30.
a We see from the table that 3 boys spent one hour or more doing their
homework, and, as there are 30 pupils in the class, the probability of selecting
3
at random a boy that spent one hour or more doing his homework will be – 30,
1
which cancels down to – 10.

b We see from the table that there are 13 + 9 pupils who spent less than 1 hour on
their homework, which is 22. So, the probability of selecting someone who
22 11
spent under an hour on their homework is – 30, which cancels down to 15.
–

Exercise 15D Adeel did a survey of the eye Number of boys Number of girls
colour of all the pupils in his
class. This table shows his Blue eyes 9 11
results: Brown eyes 4 6

a How many pupils are in Adeel’s class?

b How many boys in Adeel’s class have blue eyes?
c How many boys are there in Adeel’s class?
d What is the probability of selecting a pupil at random that:
i is a boy with blue eyes?
ii is a boy?

Shauna did a survey of how Number of boys Number of girls

all the pupils in her class
travelled to school. This table Walked 10 4
shows her results: Bus 6 9

a How many pupils are in Shauna’s class?

b How many boys in Shauna’s class walked to school?
c How many girls are there in Shauna’s class?
d What is the probability of selecting a pupil at random that:
i is a boy who walks to school?
ii is a girl?

184
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 185

Chi did a survey of hair Number of boys Number of girls

colour of all the pupils in her
class. This table shows her Dark hair 12 6
results: Light hair 4 9

a How many pupils are in Chi’s class?

b How many girls in Chi’s class had dark hair?
c How many pupils in Chi’s class had dark hair?
d What is the probability of selecting a pupil at random that:
i is a girl with dark hair?
ii is a dark-haired pupil?

There are 17 boys and 12 girls in Padmini’s class. 8 boys and 4 girls have dark hair.
The others all have light hair.
a Copy and complete this Number of boys Number of girls
table for Padmini’s class.
b What is the probability Dark hair
of selecting a pupil at Light hair
random that:
i is a light-haired boy?
ii is a girl with light hair?

Find the necessary data to find the following probabilities, selecting at

random a pupil from your class that is:
a a blue-eyed boy
b a girl that can swim
c a dark-haired boy
d a girl that has been abroad for her holiday
e a girl that can ride a bike

4 I can collect and record data in a frequency table.

I can use the range to describe a set of data.

5 I can compare two distributions using mean and range, then draw conclusions.
I can interpret pie charts.
I can calculate probabilities based on experimental evidence.

185
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 186

1 2006 4–6 Paper 1

4 Red kites are large birds that were very rare in England.
Scientists set free some red kites in 1989 and hoped that they would build nests.
The diagrams show how many nests the birds built from 1991 to 1996.

20 km 20 km 20 km

10 km 10 km 10 km

Key:
shows where the
birds were set free
1991 1992 1993
represents a nest
without eggs
20 km 20 km 20 km
represents a nest
with eggs
10 km 10 km 10 km

1994 1995 1996

Use the diagrams to answer these questions:

a Which was the first year there were nests with eggs?

b In 1993, how many nests were without eggs?

c In 1995, how many nests were more than 10 km from where the birds were set free?

d Explain what happened to the number of nests over the years.

e Now explain what happened to the distances of the nests from where the birds were set free, over the
years.

2 2005 4–6 Paper 2 Other

Clothes
Look at this information:
In 1976, a man earned £16.00 each week.
The pie chart shows how this man spent his money: Entertainment Rent
a How much did the man spend on food each week?

b Now look at this information:

In 2002, a man earned £500.00 each week.

Food

186
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 187

This table shows how he spent his money: Rent £200

Draw a pie chart to show how this man spent Food £100
his money.
Entertainment £150
Remember to label each sector of the pie chart.
Other £50

3 2007 3–5 Paper 2

The diagram shows five fair spinners with grey and white sectors.
Each spinner is divided into equal sectors.

A B C

D E

I am going to spin all the pointers.

a For one of the spinners, the probability of spinning grey is 34.

Which spinner is this? Write its letter.

b For two of the spinners, the probability of spinning grey is more than 60% but less than 70%.
Which two spinners are these? Write their letters.

4 2000 Paper 2
A school has a new canteen. A special person will be chosen to perform the opening ceremony.
The names of all the pupils, all the teachers and all the canteen staff are put into a box. One name is taken
out at random.
A pupil says:
‘There are only three choices. It could be a pupil, a teacher or one of the canteen staff. The
probability of it being a pupil is 1–3.’

The pupil is wrong. Explain why.

187
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 188

CHAPTER 16 Number 5
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to multiply and divide How to do long and short
decimals by whole numbers multiplication and division
How to use the memory keys Equivalence of fractions,
on a calculator decimals and percentages
How to use the square root and How to use a calculator
sign change keys on a efficiently, including the use of
calculator brackets
How to calculate fractions and
percentages of quantities

Adding and subtracting decimals

You have already met addition and subtraction of decimals in Chapter 2. In this section,
you will be doing problems involving whole numbers, decimals and metric units.

Example 16.1 Work out: a 4 + 0.86 + 0.07 b 6 – 1.45

a Whole numbers have a decimal point after the units digit. So, put in zeros for
the missing place values, and line up the decimal points:
4.00
0.86
+ 0.07
——
4.93
1

b As in the previous sum, put in zeros to make up the missing place values, and
line up the decimal points:
5 9 1
6⁄ .0⁄ 0
– 1.45
——
4.55

Example 16.2 Nazia has done 4.3 km of a 20 km bike ride. How far does Nazia still have to go?
The units are the same, so
1 9 1
2⁄ 0⁄ .0
– 4.3
——
15.7
Nazia still has to go 15.7 km.

188
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 189

Example 16.3 Mary wants to lose 3 kg in weight. So far she has lost 650 grams. How much more
does she need to lose?
The units need to made the same. So change 650 grams into 0.65 kg. This gives:
2 9 1
3⁄ .0⁄ 0
– 0.65
——
2.35
Mary still has to lose 2.35 kg.

Exercise 16A Without using a calculator, work out each of these.

a
c
3.5 + 4.7
3.4 + 1.7
b
d
6.1 + 2.8
12.41 + 8.69
4
e 9.3 – 6.1 f 3.5 – 2.7
g 17.5 – 13.7 h 27.65 – 16.47

Without using a calculator, work out each of these.

a 4 – 2.38 b 5 – 1.29 c 8 – 3.14 d 12 – 2.38
e 7 – 1.08 f 10 – 2.66 g 24 – 12.3 h 15 – 6.09

The diagram shows the lengths of the 3 km F

paths in a park. B
a How long are the paths
0.8 km 3 km 1.2 km
altogether? 1.3 km
b John wants to visit all the points A, C
B, C, D, E and F in this order. He 1.1 km 0.9 km E
A 1.3 km
wants to start and finish at A and
go along each and every path. 2.1 km D 3.7 km
Explain why he cannot do this in
the distance you worked out for part a.
c Work out the shortest distance John could walk if he wanted to visit each point,
starting and finishing at A.

A Christmas cake weighs 2 kg. Arthur takes a slice weighing 235 grams. How much
is left?

23 cl of water is poured from a jug containing 3 litres. How much is left?

1560 millimetres of ribbon is cut from a roll that is 5 metres long. How much ribbon
is left?

The three legs of a relay are 3 km, 4.8 km and 1800 m. How far is the race
altogether?

Three packages weigh 4 kg, 750 grams and 0.08 kg. How much do they weigh
altogether?

189
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 190

Write down all the pairs of single-digit numbers that add up to 9: for
example, 2 + 7.
By looking at your answers to Question 2 in Exercise 16A and working out
the following:
a 1 – 0.435 b 6 – 2.561 c 12 – 3.6754
explain how you can just write down the answers when you are taking away
a decimal from a whole number.
Make a poster to explain this to a Year 6 pupil.

Multiplying and dividing decimals

When you add together 1.2 + 1.2 + 1.2 + 1.2, you get 4.8.
This sum can be written as 4 × 1.2 = 4.8. It can also be written as 4.8 ÷ 4 = 1.2.
You are now going to look at how to multiply and divide decimals by whole numbers.
These two operations are just like any type of division and multiplication but you need to
be sure where to put the decimal point. As a general rule, there will be the same number
of decimal places in the answer as there were in the original problem.

Example 16.4 Work out: a 5 × 3.7 b 8 × 4.3 c 9 × 1.08 d 6 × 3.5

Each of these can be set out in a column:
a 3.7 b 4.3 c 1.08 d 3.5
× 5 × 8 × 9 × 6
—— —— —— ——
18.5 34.4 9.72 21.0
3 2 7 3

You see that the decimal point stays in the same place. You would give the answer
to part d as 21.

Example 16.5 Work out: a 22.8 ÷ 6 b 33.6 ÷ 7 c 9.59 ÷ 7 d 26.2 ÷ 5

These can be set out as short division:
a ——3.8 b ——4.8 c 1.37
—— d ——5.24
6 / 22.8 7 / 33.6 7 / 9.59 5 / 26.20
4 5 2 4 1 2

Once again, the decimal point stays in the same place. Notice that a zero had to be
put in part d.

Exercise 16B Without using a calculator, work out each of these.

a 3.14 × 5 b 1.73 × 8 c 1.41 × 6 d 2.26 × 9
e 6 × 3.35 f 9 × 5.67 g 5 × 6.17 h 9 × 9.12

190
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 191

Without using a calculator, work out each of these.

a 17.04 ÷ 8 b 39.2 ÷ 7 c 27.2 ÷ 8 d 30.6 ÷ 5
e 25.88 ÷ 4 f 4.44 ÷ 3 g 27.72 ÷ 9 h 22.4 ÷ 5

A piece of wood, 2.8 metres long, is cut into five equal pieces. How long is each
piece?

Five bars of metal each weigh 2.35 kg. How much do they weigh together?

A cake weighing 1.74 kg is cut into six equal pieces. How much does each piece
weigh?

Eight bottles of pop cost £6.24. How much is one bottle?

One floppy disk holds 1.44 Mb of information. How much information will six
floppy disks hold?

Use a calculator to work out each of the following.

a 46 × 34 b 4.6 × 34 c 4.6 × 3.4 d 0.46 × 0.34
Try some examples of your own.
You will notice that the digits of all the answers are the same but that the
decimal point is in different places. Can you see the rule for placing the
decimal point?

Using a calculator
Your calculator is broken. Only the keys shown are working.
Using just these keys, can you make all the numbers up to 25?
For example:
1=4–3 12 = 3 × 4 15 = 4 + 4 + 7 3
You have already met brackets on a calculator in Chapter 9 4
(page 114). With the most recent calculators, using brackets is
probably the best way to do lengthy calculations. The problem 7 –
with keying in a calculation using brackets is that there is no + =
intermediate working to check where you made mistakes. One
way round this is to use the memory keys, or to write down the
intermediate values. (This is what examiners call ‘working’.)
The memory is a location inside the calculator where a number can be stored.
The memory keys are not exactly the same on different makes of calculators, but they all
do the same things. Let us look at the four main keys:

Min This key puts the value in the display into the memory and the contents of the
memory are lost. This is STO on some calculators.

191
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 192

M+ This key adds the contents of the display to the contents of the memory.

M– This key subtracts the contents of the display from the contents of the memory. This
is SHIFT M+ on some calculators.

MR This key recalls the contents of the memory and puts it in the display. The contents
of the display will disappear but may still be involved in the calculation.

Example 16.6 Calculate: a 16.8 + 28.8

–––––––––– b 60.3 ÷ (16.3 – 9.6)
23.8 – 16.2
a Type in 23.8 – 16.2 =, which gives an answer of 7.6. Store this in the memory
with Min.
Type in 16.8 + 28.8 =, which gives 45.6 in the display. Type ÷ MR =. This should
give an answer of 6.
b Type in 16.3 – 9.6 =, which gives an answer of 6.7. Store this with Min.
Type in 60.3 ÷ MR =, which should give an answer of 9.

Two other very useful keys are the square root key √ and the sign change key +/– .
Note that not all calculators have a sign change key. Some have (–) . Also, the square
root key has to be pressed before the number on some calculators and after the number
on others.
The best thing to do is to get your own calculator and learn how to use it.

Example 16.7 Calculate: a √432 b 180 – (32 + 65)

a Either √ 432 = or 432 √ = should give 20.78460969. Round this off to 20.78.
b Type in 32 + 65 =, which should give 97. Press the sign change key and the
display should change to –97. Type in +180 =, which should give 83.

The sign change key is also used to input a negative number. For example, on some
calculators, 2 +/– will give a display of –2.

Exercise 16C Use the memory keys to work out each of the following. Write down any values that
you store in the memory.
a 17.8 + 25.6
–––––––––– b 35.7 – 19.2
––––––––––– c –––––––––––
16.9 + 23.6 d 47.2 – 19.6
––––––––––
14.5 – 8.3 34.9 – 19.9 16.8 – 14.1 11.1 – 8.8
e 45.6 – (23.4 – 6.9) f 44.8 ÷ (12.8 – 7.2) g (4 x 28.8) ÷ (9.5 – 3.1)

Use the sign change key to enter the first negative number. Then use the calculator to
work out the value of each of these.
a –2 + 3 – 7 b –4 – 6 + 8 c –6 + 7 – 8 + 2 d –5 + 3 – 8 + 9

Use the square root key to work out:

a √400 b √300 c √150 d √10

What happens if you press the sign key twice in succession?

192
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 193

Calculate each of the following i using the brackets keys, and ii using the memory
keys.
Write out the key presses for each. Which method uses fewer key presses?
a –––––––––––
12.9 + 42.9 b –––––––––––
72.4 – 30.8 c 25.6 ÷ (6.7 – 3.5)
23.7 – 14.4 16.85 – 13.6

If you start with 16 and press the square root key twice in succession, the display
shows 2. If you start with 81 and press the square root key twice in succession, the
display shows 3.
6
Explain what numbers are shown in the display.

It helps to understand how a calculator works if you can think like a

calculator. So, do the following without using a calculator.
You are told what the number in the memory and the number in the display are.
After each series of operations shown below, what number will be in the
display and what number will be in the memory? The first one has been done
as an example.

Starting number Starting number Operations Final number Final number

in display in memory in display in memory
6 10 M+, M+, M+ 6 28
a 6 10 Min, M+, M+
b 6 10 M–, MR
c 12 5 M+, MR, M+
d 10 6 M+, M+, M+, MR
e 10 6 MR, M+, M+
f 8 8 M–, M+, MR, M+
g 15 20 M–, M–, MR, M+

Fractions of quantities
This section is going to help you to revise the rules for working with fractions.
2 3
Example 16.8 Find: a –
7 of £28 b –
5 of 45 sweets c 1–23 of 15 m
a First, find –17 of £28: 28 ÷ 7 = 4. So, –27 of £28 = 2 × 4 = £8.
b First, find –15 of 45 sweets: 45 ÷ 5 = 9. So, –35 of 45 sweets = 3 × 9 = 27 sweets.
c Either calculate –23 of 15 and add it to 15, or make 1–23 into a top-heavy fraction
and work out 5–3 of 15.
15 ÷ 3 = 5, so –23 of 15 = 10. Hence, 1–23 of 15 m = 15 + 10 = 25 m.
15 ÷ 3 = 5, so –53 of 15 = 25 m.

193
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 194

Example 16.9 Find: a 7× 3

–
4 b 8 × –23 c 5 × 1–35
a 7× 3
–
4
21
=– 1
4 = 54
–

b 8 × –23 = 16 1
– = 5–
3 3

c 5 × 1–35 = 5 × 8–5 = 40
– = 8
5

5
Example 16.10 A magazine has 96 pages. –
12 of the pages have adverts on them. How many pages
have adverts on them?
1
–
12 of 96 = 8. So, 5
–
12 of 96 = 5 × 8 = 40 pages.

Exercise 16D Find each of these.

2 3
a 3 of £27 b 5 of 75 kg c 1 32 of 18 metres d 4
9 of £18
3 5 3
e 10 of £46 f 8 of 840 houses g 7 of 21 litres h 1 52 of 45 minutes
5 3
i 6 of £63 j 8 of 1600 loaves k 1 47 of 35 km l 7
10 of 600 crows
2 4 7 3
m 9 of £1.26 n 9 of 540 children o 12 of 144 miles p 3 11 of £22

Find each of these as a mixed number.

a 5× 3
4 b 8× 2
7 c 6 × 1 23 d 4× 3
8

e 9× 1
4 f 5 × 1 65 g 9× 4
5 h 7 × 2 43
i 3 × 3 37 j 8× 2
11 k 4 × 1 72 l 6× 7
9

m 2 × 3 34 n 3× 7
10 o 5 × 1 10
3
p 2 × 10 58

2
A bag of rice weighed 1300 g. 5 of it was used to make a meal. How much was left?

3
Mrs Smith weighed 96 kg. She lost 8 of her weight due to a diet. How much did she
weigh after the diet?

3
A petrol tank holds 52 litres. 4 is used on a journey. How many litres are left?

3
A GCSE textbook has 448 pages. 28 of the pages are the answers. How many pages
of answers are there?

5
A bar of chocolate weighs 8 of a kilogram. How much do seven bars weigh?

2
A Smartie machine produces 1400 Smarties a minute. 7 of them are red. How many
red Smarties will the machine produce in an hour?

A farmer has nine cows. Each cow eats 1 23 bales of silage a week. How much do
they eat altogether?

2
A cake recipe requires 3 of a cup of walnuts. How many cups of walnuts will be
needed for five cakes?

194
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 195

This is about dividing fractions by a whole number.

Dividing a fraction by 2 has the same effect as halving the fraction. For example:
2
–
7 ÷ 2 = –27 × 1–2 = 1–7
Work out each of the following.
2 3 4 7
a 3 ÷2 b 4 ÷2 c 5 ÷2 d 8 ÷2
4 2 3 3
e 7 ÷3 f 5 ÷5 g 8 ÷4 h 10 ÷5

Percentages of quantities
This section will show you how to calculate simple percentages of quantities. This section
will also revise the equivalence between fractions, percentages and decimals.

Example 16.11 Calculate: a 15% of £670 b 40% of £34

Calculate 10%, then use multiples of this.
a 10% of £670 = £67, 5% = 33.50. So, 15% of £670 = 67 + 33.5 = £100.50.
b 10% of £34 = £3.40. So, 40% of £34 = 4 × 3.40 = £13.60.

Example 16.12 Write down the equivalent percentage and fraction for each of these decimals.
a 0.6 b 0.28
To change a decimal to a percentage, multiply by 100. This gives: a 60% b 28%
To change a decimal to a fraction, multiply and divide by 10, 100, 1000 as
appropriate and cancel if possible. This gives:

a 0.6 = –6 = –
3 b 0.28 = –28 = –
7
10 5 100 25

Example 16.13 Write down the equivalent percentage and decimal for each of these fractions.

a 7
– b –9
20 25
To change a fraction into a percentage, make the denominator 100. This gives:

a 7 = –
– 35 = 35% 9 =–
b – 36 = 36%
20 100 25 100
To change a fraction into a decimal, divide the top by the bottom, or make into a
percentage, then divide by 100. This gives:
a 0.35 b 0.36

195
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 196

Example 16.14 Write down the equivalent decimal and fraction for each of these percentages.
a 95% b 26%
To convert a percentage to a decimal, divide by 100. This gives: a 0.95 b 0.26
To convert a percentage to a fraction, make a fraction over 100 then cancel if
possible. This gives:
a 95% = – 95 = 19– b 26% = – 26 = 13
–
100 20 100 50

Exercise 16E Copy the cross-number puzzle. Use the clues to fill it in. Then use the puzzle to fill
in the missing numbers in the clues.
Across Down 1 1 2 1

1 71% of 300 1 96% of …… 3 1 4

3 73% of 200 2 81% of ……
1 5 6
5 107% of 200 3 50% of 24
8 58% of …… 4 25% of 596 1 7 1 8

9 88% of 400 6 61% of 200 1 9 1

7 100% of 63

Copy and complete this table.

a b c d e f g h i j
Decimal 0.45 0.76 0.36 0.85
9 3 4 3
Fraction 20 5 25 50

Percentage 45% 32% 37.5% 65%

Calculate:
a 35% of £340
b 15% of £250
c 60% of £18
d 20% of £14.40
e 45% of £440
f 5% of £45
g 40% of £5.60
h 25% of £24.40

A Jumbo Jet carries 400 passengers. On one trip, 52% of the passengers were British,
17% were American, 12% were French and the rest were German.
a How many people of each nationality were on the plane?
b What percentage were German?

196
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 197

Copy the cross-number puzzle. Work out each percentage.

Then use the puzzle to fill in the missing numbers in the clues.
Across Down
1 2 3 4
1 54 out of 200 2 …… out of 400
3 33 out of 50 4 134 out of 200 5 6
5 13 out of 25 6 …… out of 300 7 8 9
8 99 out of 100 7 100 out of 400
10 11 12 13
10 …… out of 200 9 …… out of 20
12 27 out of 50 11 110 out of 1000 14
14 38 out of 200 13 23 out of 50

Solving problems
Below are two investigations. Before you start either of these, read the question carefully
and think about how you are going to record your results. Show all your working clearly.

Who wants to be a millionaire?

You have won a prize in a lottery. You have a choice of how to take the prize.
You can either:
Take £10 000 in the first year, 10% less (£9000) in the second year, 10% less than the
second year’s amount (£8100) in the third year, and so on for 10 years.
Or
Take £1000 in the first year, 50% more (£1500) in the second year, 50% more than the
second year’s amount (£1500) in the third year, and so on for 10 years.
You will probably need to use a calculator and round off the amounts to the nearest penny.
What would happen if the second method gave 40% more each year?
What would happen if the second method started with £10 000?

Chocolate bars
Eight children, Alf, Betty, Charles, Des, Ethel, Fred, George and Helen, are lined up
outside a room in alphabetical order.
Inside the room are three tables. Each table has eight chairs around it.
On the first table is one chocolate bar, on the second table are two chocolate bars, and
on the third table are three chocolate bars.
The children go into the room one at a time and sit at one of the tables. After they are all
seated they share out the chocolate bars on the table at which they are seated.
Where should Alf sit to make sure he gets the most chocolate?

197
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 198

4 I can use simple fractions and percentages to describe proportions of a whole.

I can add and subtract decimals to two places.

5 I can add, subtract, multiply and divide decimals.

I can use a calculator effectively.
I can calculate fractions of a quantity.
I can calculate percentages of a quantity.

6 I can convert between fractions, decimals and percentages.

I can solve more complex problems.

1 2006 4–6 Paper 1

4 a Add together 1740 and 282.

b Now add together 17.4 and 2.82. You can use part a to help you.

c 3.5 + 2.35 is bigger than 3.3 + 2.1.

How much bigger?

2 2006 4–6 Paper 1

a Add together 3.7 and 6.5.

b Subtract 5.7 from 15.2.

c Multiply 254 by 5.

d Divide 342 by 6.

3 2004 4–6 Paper 1

You can buy a new calculator for £1.25.
In 1979 the same calculator cost 22 times as
much as it costs now.
How much did the same type of calculator cost
in 1979?
Show your working.

198
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:04 Page 199

4 2003 4–6 Paper 2

A glass holds 225 ml.
An adult needs about 1.8 litres of water each day
to stay healthy.
How many glasses is that?
Show your working. 225 ml

199
FM Ch 16 Small Business PB 7.2 14/2/08 15:20 Page 200

Functional Maths

Running a small business – a group activity

Plan

1 You are setting up a small business to buy materials,

make gadgets and sell them for profit.

Facts

2 You have £20 000 to invest in your business.

One machine to produce your
gadgets costs £2500.
The machines also cost £500
per week each to maintain.
Each machine can produce
100 gadgets per day but
requires two workers to use it.
Workers are paid £400 per week each.
The cost of materials to produce one gadget is £12.

Weekly sales figures

3 The number of sales depends on the selling price.

The table shows maximum weekly sales for different
selling prices.

Selling price £18 £19 £20 £21

Maximum number of gadgets
2000 1500 1000 500
that can be sold per week

200
FM Ch 16 Small Business PB 7.2 14/2/08 15:20 Page 201

Your aim Hints and tactics

4 To make as much profit as 5 Try buying different numbers of
possible at the end of 6 weeks. machines to start with.
Use some of your profits to buy
extra machines.
Sell at the highest of the selling
prices that you can.
Your total costs cannot be
greater than the amount of
money you have at the start of
any week.

An example

6 Here is an example of a week if you buy one machine and employ two workers.
Be careful: If you buy four machines you cannot pay any workers to produce gadgets and will
be bankrupt!
Week 1
(£20 000 available to spend)

Cost of machines 1 × £2500 = £2500 Income = Selling price × 500 × £21 = £10 500
bought Number of gadgets sold
Maintenance cost 1 × £500 = £500
of machines
Cost of workers 2 × £400 = £800 Total profit £10 500 – £9800 = £700
Number of gadgets 500
produced
Cost of materials 500 × £12 = £6000
Total costs £9800 Balance £20 000 + £700 = 20 700

Profit for week 1 = £700

Amount available to spend in week 2 = £20 700

201
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 202

CHAPTER 17 Algebra 5
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to use the algebraic ideas How to solve simple equations
given in previous chapters How to use simple formulae
How to extend these ideas into and derive a formula
more difficult problems How to find the term-to-term
rule in a sequence
How to plot coordinates and
draw graphs
How to use algebra to solve
simple problems

Solving equations
You have already met simple equations in Chapter 6.
The scales show an equation.
The left-hand pan has 3 bags and 2 marbles.
The right-hand pan has 17 marbles.
Each bag contains the same number of marbles.
How many marbles are in a bag?

Let the number of marbles in a bag be x,

which gives: 3x + 2 = 17
Take 2 marbles away from each side: 3x + 2 – 2 = 17 – 2
This gives: 3x = 15
Now, 3x means 3 × x. This is equal to 15. So: x =5
There are 5 marbles in each bag.
You will usually solve these types of equation by subtracting or adding to both sides in
order to have a single term on each side of the equals sign.

Example 17.1 Solve 4x + 3 = 31.

Subtract 3 from both sides: 4x + 3 – 3 = 31 – 3
4x = 28
(4 × ? = 28)
x =7

Example 17.2 Solve 3x – 5 = 13.

Add 5 to both sides: 3x – 5 + 5 = 13 + 5
3x = 18
(3 × ? = 18)
x =6

202
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 203

Exercise 17A Solve each of the following equations.

a 2x + 3 = 11 b 2x + 5 = 13 c 3x + 4 = 19 d 3x + 7 = 19
6
e 4m + 1 = 21 f 5k + 6 = 21 g 4n + 9 = 17 h 2x + 7 = 27
i 6h + 5 = 23 j 3t + 5 = 26 k 8x + 3 = 35 l 5y + 3 = 28
m 7x + 3 = 10 n 4t + 7 = 39 o 3x + 8 = 20 p 8m + 5 = 21

Solve each of the following equations.

a 3x – 2 = 13 b 2m – 5 = 1 c 4x – 1 = 11 d 5t – 3 = 17
e 2x – 3 = 13 f 4m – 5 = 19 g 3m – 2 = 10 h 7x – 3 = 25
i 5m – 2 = 18 j 3k – 4 = 5 k 8x – 5 = 11 l 2t – 3 = 7
m 4x – 3 = 5 n 8y – 3 = 29 o 5x – 4 = 11 p 3m – 1 = 17

Solve each of the following equations.

a 3x + 4 = 10 b 5x – 1 = 29 c 4x – 3 = 25 d 3m – 2 = 13
e 5m + 4 = 49 f 7m + 3 = 24 g 4m – 5 = 23 h 6k + 1 = 25
i 5k – 3 = 2 j 3k – 1 = 23 k 2k + 5 = 15 l 7x – 3 = 18
m 4x + 3 = 43 n 5x + 6 = 31 o 9x – 4 = 68

Solve the following equations.

a 12x + 3 = 87 b 13x + 4 = 56
c 15x – 1 = 194 d 14x – 3 = 137
e 13m – 2 = 24 f 15m + 4 = 184
g 17m + 3 = 105 h 14m – 5 = 219
i 16k + 1 = 129 j 15k – 3 = 162
k 13k – 1 = 38 l 12k + 5 = 173
m 17x – 4 = 285 n 14x + 3 = 73
o 15x + 6 = 231 p 19x – 4 = 167

Solve the following equations.

a x+3 =5
––––– b x–1 =9
––––– c x+6 =5
–––––
2 3 5

d x–2 =8
––––– e x+5 =3
––––– f x+1 =3
–––––
5 6 4

g x–7 =4
––––– h x–3 =8
––––– i x–6 =2
–––––
5 4 7

203
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 204

Formulae
Formulae occur in many situations, some of which you have already met. You need to be
able to use formulae to calculate a variety of quantities.

Example 17.3 One rule to find the area of a triangle is to take half of the length of its base and
multiply it by the vertical height of the triangle. This rule, written as a formula is:
A = –12 bh
where A = area, b = base length, and h = vertical height.
Using this formula to calculate the area of a triangle with a base length of 7 cm and
a vertical height of 16 cm gives:
Area = –12 × 7 × 16 = 56 cm2

Exercise 17B The average of three numbers is given by the formula:

A= m
––+n+p
3
where A is the average and m, n and p are the numbers.
a Use the formula to find the average of 4, 8 and 15.
b What is the average of 32, 43 and 54?

The perimeter of a rectangle is given by the formula:

P = 2(m + n)
where P is the perimeter, m is the length and n is the width.
a Use the formula to find the perimeter of a rectangle 5 cm by 8 cm.
b Use the formula to find the perimeter of a rectangle 13 cm by 18 cm.

The average speed of a car is given by the formula:

A = –d
t
where A is the average speed in miles per hour, d is the number of miles travelled,
and t is the number of hours taken for the journey.
a Find the average speed of a car which travels 220 miles in 4 hours.
b In 8 hours a car covered 360 miles. What was the average speed?

The speed, v m/s, of the train t seconds after passing through a station with a speed of
u m/s, is given by the formula:
v = u + 5t
a What is the speed 4 seconds after leaving a station with a speed of 12 m/s?
b What is the speed 10 seconds after leaving a station with a speed of 8 m/s?

204
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 205

The speed, v, of a land speed car can be calculated using the following formula:
v = u + at
where v is the speed after t seconds, u is the initial speed, and a is the acceleration.
a Calculate the speed of the car with 10 m/s2 acceleration 8 seconds after it had a
speed of 12 m/s.
b Calculate the speed of a car with 5 m/s2 acceleration 12 seconds after it had a
speed of 15 m/s.

To change a temperature in degrees Celsius to degrees Fahrenheit, we use the

formula:
F = 32 + 1.8C
where F is the temperature in degrees Fahrenheit and C is the temperature in degrees
Celsius.
Change each of the following temperatures to degrees Fahrenheit.
a 45 °C b 40 °C c 65 °C d 100 °C

1 When a stone is dropped from the top of a cliff, the distance, d metres,
that it falls in t seconds is given by the formula: 6
d = 4.9t 2
Calculate the distance a stone has fallen 8 seconds after being dropped
from the top of a cliff.
2 The distance, D km, which you can see out to sea from the shore line, at a
height of h metres above sea level, is given by the formula:
D = √(12.5h)
How far out to sea can you see from the top of a cliff, 112 metres above sea
level?

Dotty investigations

Exercise 17C Look at the following two shapes drawn on a dotted square grid.

205
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 206

By drawing some of your own shapes (with no dots inside each shape), complete the
table below, giving the number of dots on each perimeter and the area of each shape.

Number of dots on perimeter Area of shape

4 1 cm 2
6
8
10 4 cm 2
12
14
16

What is special about the number of dots on the perimeter of all the shapes in the
table of Question 1?

For a shape with no dots inside, one way to calculate the area of the shape from the
number of dots on the perimeter is to:
Divide the number of dots by two, then subtract 1.
a Check that this rule works for all the shapes drawn in Question 1.
b Write this rule as a formula, where A is the area of a shape and D is the number
of dots on its perimeter.

Look at the following two shapes drawn on a dotted square grid. They both have one
dot inside.

By drawing some of your own shapes (with only one dot inside each shape),
complete the table below.

Number of dots on perimeter Dots inside Area of shape

4 1
6 1
8 1 4 cm2
10 1
12 1
14 1
16 1

206
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 207

For the shapes in Question 4, find a formula to connect A, the area of each shape
with D, the number of dots on its perimeter.
6
a Draw some shapes with an even number of dots on each perimeter and two dots
inside each shape.
b Find the formula connecting A, the area of each shape, with D, the number of
dots on its perimeter.

a Draw some shapes with an even number of dots on each perimeter and three
dots inside each shape.
b Find the formula connecting A, the area of each shape, with D, the number of
dots on its perimeter.

Repeat these investigations but use an odd number of dots on the perimeter
of each shape.

Graphs from the real world

When you fill your car with petrol, both the amount of petrol you have taken and its cost
are displayed on the pump. One litre of petrol costs about 80p, but this rate does change
from time to time.
The table below shows the costs of different quantities of petrol as displayed on a petrol
pump.

Petrol (litres) 5 10 15 20 25 30
Cost (£) 4 8 12 16 20 24

This information can also be represented by the following ordered pairs:

(5, 4) (10, 8) (15, 12) (20, 16) (25, 20) (30, 24)
On the right is the graph which relates 25
the cost of petrol to the quantity bought.
20

This is an example of a conversion graph.

15
Cost (£)

You can use it to find the cost of any

quantity of petrol, or to find how much
10
petrol can be bought for different
amounts of money.
5
Conversion graphs are usually straight-
line graphs.
0
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
Petrol bought (litres)

207
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 208

Exercise 17D
5

Cost (£)
2

0
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Weight of apples (kg)

Use the graph to answer these questions:

a Find the cost of each quantity of apples.
i 3 kg ii 7 kg
b What weight of apples can be bought for:
i £3? ii £2.40?

The graph below shows the distance travelled by a car during an interval of 5 minutes.
5

4
Distance (km)

0
0 1 2 3 4 5
Time (minutes)

a Find the distance travelled during the second minute of the journey.
b Find the time taken to travel 3 km.

Here is a kilometre–mile 5
conversion graph.
a Express each of the 4
following distances
in km. 3
Miles

i 3 miles
ii 4.5 miles 2
b Express each of the
following distances 1
in miles.
i 2 km 0
ii 4 km 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
iii 6 km Kilometres

208
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 209

a Copy and complete the following table for the exchange rate of the euro.

–)
Euros (C 1 5 10 15 20
6
Pounds (£) 0.60 3.00

b Use the data from this table to draw a conversion graph from pounds to euros.
c Use your graph to convert each of the following to pounds.
i –
C7 ii – C 16 iii –
C 17.50
d Use your graph to convert each of the following to euros.
i £9 ii £12 iii £10.80

A box weighs 2 kg. Packets of juice, each weighing 425 g, are packed into it.
a Draw a graph to show the weight of the box plus the packets of juice and the
number of packets of fruit juice put into the box.
b Find, from the graph, the number of packets of juice that make the weight of the
box and packets as close to 5 kg as possible.

A taxi firm charges a basic charge of £2 plus £1 a mile.

Draw a graph to show how much the firm charges for journeys up to 10 km.
Describe the difference between this graph and the one in Exercise 17D.
Draw a graph to show the cost of gas from a supplier who charges a fixed fee
of £18 plus 3p per unit of gas. Draw the horizontal axis from 0 to 500 units
and the vertical axis from £0 to £35.

5 I can use formulae with more than one variable such as A = (x + y) ÷ 2, to work out the values of
one variable given the values of the other variables, i.e. A = 10 when x = 7 and y = 13.
I can read values from conversion graphs.

6 I can solve equations with more than one operation, such as: 3x + 5 = 11, therefore x = 2.
I can investigate a mathematical problem by setting up tables of values and recognising patterns.
I can set up tables of values and draw graphs to show relationships between variables.

209
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 210

1 2004 4–6 Paper 1 y

A company sells books using the Internet. 10
The graph shows their delivery charges. 9
a Use the graph to find the missing values from this 8
table.
7

Delivery charge (£)

Number of books Delivery charge (£)
6
8
5
9
4
b For every extra book you buy, how much more
3
must you pay for delivery?
2
c A second company sells books using the Internet.
Its delivery charge is £1.00 per book. 1
Copy the graph and draw a line on it to show this 0 x
information. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Number of books
d Complete the sentence:
Delivery is cheaper with the first company if you buy at least …… books.

2 2006 4–6 Paper 1

Solve these equations:

a 2k + 3 = 11

b 2t + 3 = –11

3 2006 3–5 Paper 1

Look at this sequence of patterns made with hexagons.

pattern number 1 pattern number 2 pattern number 3

To find the number of hexagons in pattern number n you can use these rules:
Number of grey hexagons = n + 1
Number of white hexagons = 2n

Altogether, what is the total number of hexagons in pattern number 20?

210
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 211

CHAPTER 18 Geometry and Measures 5

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
The names and properties of How to reflect, rotate and
polygons translate shapes
How to tessellate 2-D shapes How to draw and measure
How to make 3-D models angles
How to calculate the angles on
a straight line, in a triangle and
around a point
How to draw nets for 3-D
shapes

Polygons
A polygon is any 2-D shape that has straight sides.
The names of the most common polygons are given in the table below.

Number of sides Name of polygon

3 Triangle
4 Quadrilateral
5 Pentagon
6 Hexagon
7 Heptagon
8 Octagon
9 Nonagon
10 Decagon

A convex polygon has all its diagonals inside the polygon.

A concave polygon has at least one diagonal outside the polygon.

Example 18.1

A convex pentagon A concave hexagon

(all diagonals inside) (two diagonals outside)

211
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 212

A regular polygon has all its sides equal and all its interior angles are equal.

Example 18.2 A regular octagon has eight lines of symmetry

and rotational symmetry of order 8.

Exercise 18A Which shapes below are polygons? If they are, write down their names.

a b c d e

Which shapes below are regular polygons?

a b c d e

State whether each of the shapes below is a convex polygon or a concave polygon.
a b c d e

Draw, if possible, a pentagon which has:

a no reflex angles b one reflex angle
c two reflex angles d three reflex angles

Draw hexagons which have exactly:

a no lines of symmetry b one line of symmetry
c two lines of symmetry d three lines of symmetry

6 a Write down the names of all the different shapes

that can be made by overlapping two squares.
For example: a pentagon can be made, as shown.
Draw diagrams to show all the different shapes
that you have made.
b What shapes can be made by overlapping three squares?

212
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 213

1 Construct a regular hexagon in this way.

a Draw a circle of radius 5 cm.
b With your compasses still set to a radius of 5 cm,
go round the circumference of the circle making
marks 5 cm apart.
c Join the points where the marks cross the circle
using a ruler.
2 A triangle has no diagonals. A quadrilateral has two diagonals.
6
Investigate the total number of diagonals that can be drawn inside convex
polygons.
3 Use ICT to draw regular polygons.
a Use these instructions describe a square using LOGO:
fd 50 rt 90
fd 50 rt 90
fd 50 rt 90
fd 50 rt 90
b Use these instructions describe a regular pentagon using LOGO:
repeat 5 [fd 50 rt 72]
4 Investigate how to draw other regular polygons using LOGO.

Tessellations
A tessellation is a pattern made by fitting together the same shapes without leaving any
gaps.
When drawing a tessellation, use a square or a triangular grid, as in the examples below.
To show a tessellation, it is usual to draw up to about ten repeating shapes.

Example 18.3

213
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 214

Example 18.4

Example 18.5

Exercise 18B Make a tessellation for each of the following shapes. Use a square grid.
a b c d

Make a tessellation for each of the following shapes. Use a triangular grid.
a b c d

1 Design a tessellation of your own. Working in pairs or groups, make an

attractive poster to show all your different tessellations.
2 Here is a tessellation which uses curves. Can you design a different
curved tessellation?

3 Investigate which of the regular polygons will tessellate.

6 4 Any quadrilateral will tessellate. So, make an irregular quadrilateral tile
cut from card. Then use your tile to show how it tessellates.

214
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 215

Constructing 3-D shapes

Construct one or more of the 3-D shapes given in Exercise 18C. For each shape, you start
by drawing its net accurately on card.
Make sure that you have the following equipment before you start to draw a net: a sharp
pencil, a ruler, a protractor, a pair of scissors and a glue-stick or adhesive tape.
The tabs have been included to make it easier if you decide to glue the edges together.
The tabs can be left off if you decide to use adhesive tape.
Before folding a net, score the card using the scissors and a ruler along the fold lines.
When constructing a shape, keep one face of the net free of tabs and secure this face last.

Exercise 18C Draw each of the following nets accurately on card. Cut out the net and construct the
3-D shape.

Regular tetrahedron

Each equilateral triangle has

these measurements:

5 cm 5 cm
60° 60°
5 cm

Square-based pyramid

The square has these measurements:

5 cm

5 cm

The isosceles triangle has

these measurements:

70° 70°

5 cm

215
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 216

Triangular prism
Each rectangle has these
measurements:
6 cm

4 cm

Each equilateral triangle

has these measurements

4 cm 4 cm
60°
60°
4 cm

6 The following nets are for more complex 3-D shapes. Choose suitable
measurements and make each shape from card.
1 Octahedron 2 Regular hexagonal prism 3 Truncated square-based pyramid

4 I know the names of and can draw common 2-D shapes.

5 I can identify all the symmetrical properties of 2-D shapes.

I know how to tessellate a 2-D shape.
I can make 3-D models from a net.

216
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 217

1 2006 4–6 Paper 2

I use two congruent trapeziums to make the shapes below.
Which of these shapes are hexagons?
4
a b

c d

2 2004 4–6 Paper 2

The square grid below shows a quadrilateral that has four right angles.

a On a similar square grid, draw a quadrilateral that has exactly two right angles.

b On a similar square grid, draw a quadrilateral that has exactly one right angle.

217
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 218

3 2000 Paper 1
The sketch shows the net of a triangular prism.
tab
1

tab 5

4
tab

t ab
2
tab
3

The net is folded up and glued to make the prism.

a Which edge is tab 1 glued to? On a copy of the diagram, label this edge A.

b Which edge is tab 2 glued to? Label this edge B.

c The corner marked ● meets two other corners. Label these two other corners ●.

4 2001 Paper 1
The diagram shows a box. Draw the net for the box on a square grid.

1.5 cm
1 cm
6 cm

1.5 cm
1 cm

3 cm

1 cm

218
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 219

Index

3-D shapes decimals

constructing 215–16 adding and subtracting 188–9
types named 31–3 multiplying and dividing 14–16, 190–1
ordering 16–17
A
directed numbers 18–19
acute angles 84 dotted square grids 205–7
angles
calculating 86–8 E
drawing 136–7
measuring 134–5 equations 78–9
types 84–5 solving 202–3
areas equivalencies 48–50
rectangles 29–31 estimates 20–1
shapes 27–8 Euler’s theorem 33
triangles 204 expanding brackets 76
averages 54–8 experimental probability 65–7
axis of reflection 164 expressions 6, 72–3
simplifying 75–6
B
bar charts 59–61, 96 F
BODMAS 110
formulae 77–8, 204–5
box method 112
fractions 42–3
brackets 110–12, 191
‘brick wall’ problems 154–5 adding and subtracting 46–8
as decimals 44–6
C of quantities 193–4
calculating with measurements 116–17 full turns 44
calculator functional maths (FM) 21, 24, 26, 30, 31, 50,
functions 114–15 51, 56, 60, 61, 68, 77, 78, 94, 102, 109,
memory keys 191–2 110, 113, 117, 120, 121, 145, 146, 147,
other keys 192 148, 150, 151, 180, 181, 189, 191, 194,
Chinese method 112 196, 197, 204, 205, 208, 209, 210
column method Carbon Footprint 122–3
addition and subtraction 22–3 Child Trust Fund 162–3
long multiplication 112 Design a bedroom 40–1
constructions 136–7 Landmark spotting 176–7
conversion graphs 207–9 School Chef 104–5
coordinates 88–90, 127–8 School Sports Day 70–1
cuboids 34–6
Skiing 82–3
D Small business 200–1
data Smoothie bar 152–3
classes 96–7 Valencia 12–13
collection 98–100, 182–3 functions 4–7
comparison 95–6, 180–1 ‘Funny Face’ method 114

219
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 220

G perimeters 27–31
perpendicular lines 84
general terms 8–9
pictograms 60
graphs 127–30
pie charts 59, 62, 178–80
conversion 207–9
place values 16
grouped frequency tables 96–7
planes 84
H polygons 211–13
positive numbers 18
highest common factor 147
prisms 216
I probability
isosceles triangle 85 experimental 65–7
from two-way tables 183–5
L theoretical 62–5
length 27–8 problem solving 23–4, 50–1, 148–9, 197
like terms 75 proportion 144–8
line graphs 59, 61 pyramids 215
line segments 84 Q
line symmetry 164–5
lines quadrants 89
parallel 84 quadrilaterals 138–9
perpendicular 84
R
long division 112–13
long multiplication 112–13 range 54–6
ratios 144–8
M reciprocals 18
mappings 4–7, 127–8, 168, 172 rectangles 29–31
mean 56–8 reflections 167–9
measurement units 116 reflex angles 84
median 54–6 rhombus 85, 138
mirror lines 164, 168 right angles 84
mode 54–6 rogue values 54
multiplying out 76 rotational symmetry 166–7, 212
rotations 170–1
N rounding 106–8
negative numbers 18 rules of algebra 73–4
nets 32, 215
S
nth terms 8–9
number lines 18 samples 95
sequences 1–3, 8–9
O simplifying expressions 75–6
obtuse angles 84 sloping line graphs 130–1
operations 109–11 solution sets 156–7
opposite angles 87 square and circle problems 155–7
square numbers 22, 124–5
P square roots 22, 124–5
parallel lines 84 statistical surveys 182–3
parallelogram 85, 138 straight-line graphs 128–9
pentominoes 34 surface area 34–5
percentages 142–3 symmetry
of pie charts 178–80 line 164–5
of quantities 195–6 rotational 166–7

220
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 221

T trials 65
triangle and circle problems 157–9
tally charts 83–4, 99–100
triangle numbers 126
term-to-term rule 1–3 triangles
terms 72–3 area formula 204
tessellations 213–14 describing 85
tetrahedrons 215 types 138
theoretical probability 62–5 two-way tables 183–5
time calculations 115
transformations 168, 170 V
translations 171–3 variables 6, 72

221
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 222
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 223
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 10–18 14/2/08 17:35 Page 224

William Collins’ dream of knowledge for all began with the publication of his first book in 1819. A self-educated mill worker, he not only
enriched millions of lives, but also founded a flourishing publishing house. Today, staying true to this spirit, Collins books are packed with
inspiration, innovation and practical expertise. They place you at the centre of a world of possibility and give you exactly what you need to
explore it.
Collins. Do more.

Published by Collins Acknowledgments

An imprint of HarperCollinsPublishers The publishers thank the Qualifications and Curriculum Authority
77– 85 Fulham Palace Road for granting permission to reproduce questions from past
Hammersmith National Curriculum Test papers for Key Stage 3 Maths.
London
W6 8JB The publishers wish to thank the following for permission to
reproduce photographs:
p.12–13 (main image) © Jon Hicks / Corbis, p.40–41 (main
Browse the complete Collins catalogue at
image) © Van Hilversum / Alamy, p.41 (football image)
www.collinseducation.com
© istockphoto.com, p.70–71 (main image) © istockphoto.com,
p.70 (inset image) © istockphoto.com, p.82–83 (main and inset
images) Ted Levine / zefa / Corbis, p.82–83 (inset images)
© HarperCollinsPublishers Limited 2008
© istockphoto.com, p.104–105 (main image) © Jeff Morgan food
and drink / Alamy, p. 104–105 (all inset images)
10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
© istockphoto.com, p.122–123 (main image) © Science Photo
Library, p. 122–123 (all inset images) © istockphoto.com,
ISBN 978-0-00-726609-8
p.152–153 (main image) © Stephen Vowles / Alamy, p.162–163
(main image) © Sean Justice / Corbis, p.176–177 (all images)
Keith Gordon, Kevin Evans, Brian Speed and Trevor Senior
© istockphoto.com, p.200–201 (main and inset images)
assert their moral rights to be identified as the authors of this
© istockphoto.com
work.
Every effort has been made to trace copyright holders and to
All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be
obtain their permission for the use of copyright material. The
reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any
authors and publishers will gladly receive any information
form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying,
enabling them to rectify any error or omission at the first
recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of
opportunity.
the Publisher or a licence permitting restricted copying in the
United Kingdom issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency Ltd.,
90 Tottenham Court Road, London W1T 4LP.

Any educational institution that has purchased one copy of this

publication may make unlimited duplicate copies for use
exclusively within that institution. Permission does not extend to
reproduction, storage within a retrieval system, or transmittal in
any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise, of duplicate copies for
loaning, renting or selling to any other institution without the
permission of the Publisher.

British Library Cataloguing in Publication Data

A Catalogue record for this publication is available from the
British Library.

Commissioned by Melanie Hoffman and Katie Sergeant

Project management by Priya Govindan
Edited by Brian Ashbury
Proofread by Amanda Dickson
Design and typesetting by Jordan Publishing Design
Covers by Oculus Design and Communications
Functional maths spreads and covers management by
Laura Deacon
Illustrations by Nigel Jordan and Tony Wilkins
Printed and bound by Martins the Printers, Berwick-upon-Tweed
Production by Simon Moore
FM Ch 3 Design a bedroom PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:43 Page 40

Functional Maths

Design a bedroom

1 Here is a sketch of a plan for a bedroom.

1m

1m Window

Window
4m

Door

5m
1m

a What is the perimeter of the bedroom?

b What is the area of the bedroom?
c How much does it cost to carpet the bedroom,
if 1 m2 of carpet costs £30?

2 Posters cost £7.50 each.

a How many posters can

you buy for £50?
b How much is left over?

40
FM Ch 3 Design a bedroom PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:43 Page 41

Use catalogues or the 3 Here are sketches of the door and one of the windows.
Internet to find how much
it would cost to buy all the
furniture for the bedroom. 1m

1m

2m 1m

1
The height of the bedroom is 2 –2 m.
a Find the area of each wall in the bedroom that needs to
be painted.
b What is the total area of all four walls?
c If a one-litre tin of paint covers 12 m2, what is the
minimum number of tins required to paint the walls?

Furniture challenge

Copy the plan of the bedroom onto centimetre-squared paper. Use a scale of 1 cm to –12 m.
4 Decide where you would put the following bedroom furniture. Use cut-outs to help.

Bed Bedside table Wardrobe Chest of drawers Desk

1 1
2 m by 1 m 2 m by 2 m
– – 1–12 m by –12 m 1 m by –12 m 1 m by –12 m

41
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 42

CHAPTER 4 Number 2
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to extend your knowledge How to change an improper
of fractions and percentages fraction into a mixed number
How to add simple fractions How to use decimal notation for
How to find equivalent fractions, tenths and hundredths
percentages and decimals How to recognise simple
equivalent fractions

Fractions
These diagrams show you five ways to split a 4 by 4 grid into quarters.

How many more different ways can you find to do this?

What about splitting the 4 by 4 grid into halves?

Example 4.1 Write down the fraction of each shape that is shaded.
a b c

a 5
– The shape is divided into 8 equal parts (the denominator) and 5 parts are
8 shaded (the numerator).
b 1
– The shape is divided into 4 equal parts (the denominator) and 1 part is
4 shaded (the numerator).
c 5
– The shape is divided into 6 equal parts (the denominator) and 5 parts are
6 shaded (the numerator).

42
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 43

Example 4.2 Fill in the missing number in each of these equivalent fractions.

a – 1
1 = – b – 1
5 = – c 15
– = – 5
3 15 8 32 27
1
a Multiply by 5 b Multiply by 4 c Divide by 3
×5 ×4 ÷3
1
– –5 5
– 20
– 15
– 5
–
3 ×5 15 8 ×4 32 27 9
÷3

Exercise 4A Write down the fraction of each shape that is shaded.

a b c d 3

Draw a fraction diagram and shade it to show each fraction.

a 1 b 2 c 3 d 1
4 5 8 7

Copy and complete the following equivalent fraction series.

a 1 =
2
2 = 1 =
6
8 = 1 = 1
20 150
4
1 1
b 3 = 6 = 1 = 12 = 1 = 1
4 12 40 160
1 1

Find the missing number in each of these equivalent fractions.

a 2 = 1 b 3 = 1 c 5 = 1
3 9 8 16 9 27
d 2 = 1 e 3 = 1 f 4 = 1
5 15 7 28 9 36

g 1 = 1 h 2 = 14 i 4 = 20
5 25 11 9
1 1

Cancel each of these fractions to its simplest form.

a 4 b 6 c 14 d 15 e 18 f 20
12 9 21 20 20 50
g 8 h 6 i 4 j 12 k 16 l 25
24 12 24 20 24 35
m 6 n 12 o 18 p 45 q 28 r 120
14 9 27 20 10 40

43
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 44

Clocks have 12 divisions around the face. What fraction of a full turn does:
a the minute hand turn through from 7:15 to 7:35?
11 12 1
b the minute hand turn through from 8:25 to 9:25? 10 2
c the hour hand turn through from 1:00 to 4:00? 9 3
8 4
d the hour hand turn through from 4:00 to 5:30? 7 6 5

N This compass rose has eight divisions around its face. What fraction of a turn takes
NW NE you from:
a NW to SW clockwise? b E to S anticlockwise?
W E
c NE to S clockwise? d S to NE anticlockwise?
SW SE e W to SE clockwise? f N to NW clockwise?
S

Give each answer in its lowest terms.

a 1 metre is 100 cm. What fraction of a metre is 35 cm?
b 1 kilogram is 1000 grams. What fraction of a kilogram is 550 grams?
c 1 hour is 60 minutes. What fraction of 1 hour is 33 minutes?
d 1 kilometre is 1000 metres. What fraction of a kilometre is 75 metres?

There are 360° in one full turn. 90° is 90° = 1 of a full turn.
360° 4
1 What fraction of a full turn is each of these?
a 60° b 20° c 180° d 30°
e 45° f 36° g 5° h 450°
2 How many degrees is: a 1 of a full turn? b 1 of a full turn?
8 5
3 360 was the number of days in a year according to the Ancient
Egyptians. They also thought that numbers with lots of factors had
magical properties. Find all the factors of 360.
4 Explain how the factors can be used to work out what fraction of a full
turn is 40°.

Fractions and decimals

All of the grids below contain 100 squares. Some of the squares have been shaded in.
In each case, write down the amount that has been shaded as a fraction, a percentage
and a decimal. What connections can you see between the equivalent values?

44
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 45

Example 4.3 Convert each of the following decimals to a fraction: a 0.65 b 0.44

a 65 = 13
0.65 = – – (cancel by 5) b 44 = 11
0.44 = – – (cancel by 4)
100 20 100 25

Example 4.4 Convert each of the following fractions to a decimal: a 12

– b –
7
25 8
a Multiply top and bottom by 4: 12
– (× 4) = –48 = 0.48
25 (× 4) 100

b Multiply top and bottom by 12.5: 7 (× 12.5) = –

– 87.5 = 0.875
8 (× 12.5) 100

Example 4.5 Put the correct sign, < or >, between each pair of fractions a –
5…–
3 b 16 7
– …–
8 5 25 10
a Convert to fractions out of 100 (or decimals):
5
– = 62.5
– = 0.625, 3 –=– 60 = 0.6, so 5
– >3 –
8 100 5 100 8 5
b Convert to fractions out of 100 (or decimals):
16
– = – 64 = 0.64, – 7 = – 70 = 0.7, so 16
–< –7
25 100 10 100 25 10

Exercise 4B Convert each of these top-heavy fractions to a mixed number.

a 3 b 7 c 9 d 17 e 15 f 22
2 5 7 8 2 7
g 32 h 17 i 12 j 13 k 9 l 41
15 5 5 6 4 10

Convert each of these mixed numbers to a top-heavy fraction.

a 1 14 b 2 12 c 3 61 d 4 27 e 5 18 f 2 35
g 1 78 h 3 34 i 3 25 j 3
2 11 k 4 58 l 3 29

Match the top-heavy fractions to improper fractions.

7 11
5 4 7 5
2 5 2 15
2 12 1 25 1 34

Convert each of the following decimals to a fraction.

a 0.2 b 0.28 c 0.35 d 0.85 e 0.9 f 0.16 6
g 0.24 h 0.48 i 0.95 j 0.05 k 0.99 l 0.27

45
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 46

Convert each of the following fractions to a decimal.

6 a 3
10
b 4
25
c 3
20
d 3
8
e 23
100
f 6
25
g 7 h 14 i 13 j 11 k 115 l 26
50 25 20 10 50 25

Put the correct sign, < or >, between each pair of fractions.
a 7 … 2 b 27 … 13 c 9 … 22
50 20 50 25 10 25

Put each set of fractions in order of size, smallest first.

7 3 1 3 37 7 6
a 25 , 10 , 4 b 4 , 50 , 10 c 1 25 , 1 14 , 1 11
50

5
Which of these fractions is nearer to 1, 8 or 85 ? Show all your working.

On squared paper outline an 8 × 8 grid.

1 2 3
8 8 8 Mark it off as shown. Then fill in the rest of the values in
1
7 the boxes.
1
6
4
6
Use the diagram to put the correct sign (<, > or =)
1 2
between each pair of fractions.
5 5 2 1 3 1 3 6
a 7 … 5 b 8 … 3 c 4 … 8
1 2
4 4 1 4 2 1 3 1
d 2 … 7 e 8 … 4 f 7 … 3
1 2 3
3 3 3
3 2 1 5 5 3
g 5 … 3 h 2 … 8 i 8 … 5
1 2
2 2
3 1 5 3 2 4
j 6 … 2 k 7 … 4 l 3 … 6
1

Adding and subtracting fractions

Look at the fraction chart and the number line. 1
8
1
4
3
8
5
8
1
2
3
4
7
8 1
Explain how you could use the line to show that
118 114 18 12 158
3 1
143 178 2
1 21 + 7
8 = 2 38 and 1 12 – 7
8 = 58 . 2 18 2 14 2 83 2 21 2 85 2 43 2 87 3
3 18 3 14 3 83 3 21 3 85 3 43 3 78 4

1 1 3 1 5 3 7
0 8 4 8 2 8 4 8 1 118 114 138 112

46
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 47

Example 4.6 Add the following fractions: a 2–14 + 1–38 b 1

–
4 + 5
–
8

a Start at 2–14 on the fraction chart. Add 1 to take you to 3–14 .

2 14
Then count on –38 to 3–58.
3 14 3 38 3 21 3 58
1 5 7
b Start at on the number line and count on
–
4
–
8 to take you to 8.
–

1 1 3 1 5 3 7
0 8 4 8 2 8 4 8

Example 4.7 Subtract the following fractions: a 2–14 – 1–38 b 1–14 – 5

–
8

a Start at 2–14 on the fraction chart. Subtract 1 to take you to 1–14 .

Then count back –38 to –78. 7
8 1
b Start at 1–14 on the number line and count 181 141
back –58 to take you to –58 . 2 14

1 1 3 1 5 3 7
0 8 4 8 2 8 4 8 1 118 114

2
Example 4.8 Work out each of the following: a –
5 + 1–5 b 3
–
7 + 5–7 c 2
–
9 + 5–9 – 1–9
Unless you can use a fraction chart or a number line, fractions must have the same
denominator before they can be added or subtracted. The numerator of the answer is
just the sum (or difference) of the original numerators. The denominator does not
change. Sometimes it is possible to cancel the answer to its lowest terms.
2
a –
5 + –15 = –53 b 3
–
7 + 5–7 = 8
–
7 = 1–17 c 2
–
9 + 5–9 – 1
–
9 = 6
–
9 = –23

Exercise 4C Work out each of the following.

3 2 3 4 3 1 7 3
a 7 + 7 b 11 + 11 c 5 + 5 d 13 + 13
7 2 4 2 3 2 3 1
e 11 – 11 f 9 – 9 g 7 – 7 h 5 – 5

Work out each of the following. Cancel down to lowest terms.

3 1 1 5 3 1 7 2
a 8 + 8 b 12 + 12 c 10 + 10 d 15 + 15
4 1 3 1 5 1 7 5
e 9 – 9 f 10 – 10 g 6 – 6 h 12 – 12

Add the following fractions. The fraction chart and the number line on page 46
may help.
a 5
8 + 1
2 b 1 18 + 3
8 c 2 28 + 1 85 d 1 21 + 7
8
6
e 1 58 + 1 34 f 2 78 + 1 14 g 1 38 + 2 38 h 3
8 + 1 12 + 1 34

Add the following fractions. Convert to mixed numbers or cancel down to lowest terms.
1 1 5 5 3 3 1 2
a 3 + 3 b 6 + 6 c 10 + 10 d 9 + 9
4 13 7 5 5 1 3 5 2
e 15 + 15 f 9 + 9 g 12 + 112 h 7 + 7 + 7

47
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 48

Subtract the following fractions. The fraction chart and the number line on page 46
6 may help.
a 5
8 – 1
2 b 2 81 – 5
8 c 2 38 – 1 58 d 1 12 – 7
8

e 2 34 – 1 38 f 2 78 – 1 14 g 3 38 – 1 34 h 1 34 + 1 12 – 1 78

Subtract the following fractions. Convert to mixed numbers or cancel down to lowest
terms.
5 2 5 1 9 3 8 2
a 7 – 7 b 6 – 6 c 10 – 10 d 9 – 9
14 2 7 4 11 5 3 9 5
e 15 – 15 f 9 – 9 g 12 – 12 h 10 + 10 – 10

The Ancient Egyptians thought that 360 was a magical number because it
had lots of factors.
They also used only fractions with 1 or 2 as the numerator, together with the
commonly occurring fractions such as two-thirds, three-quarters, four-fifths
and five-sixths.
Write down all the factors of 360 (or use your results from the extension work
in Exercise 4A).
Write down the following fractions as equivalent fractions with a
denominator of 360.
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 , 3 , 4 , 5 , 6 , 8 , 9 , 10 , 12

Use these results to work out:

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
a 2 + 3 b 2 + 6 c 2 + 5 d 3 + 4 e 6 + 8

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
f 3 – 5 g 4 – 6 h 8 – 10 i 3+ 4 + 5 j 6 + 12 – 4

Cancel down your answers to their simplest form.

Equivalences
0 1
A B C D E F G H I J K

Explain why BAG = 70%, HIDE = 2.2 and FED = 1 15 .

Find the percentage value of CABBAGE. Find the decimal value of BADGE. Find the
fraction value of CHIDE. Find the percentage, decimal and fraction value of other words
you can make with these letters.

Example 4.9 Work out each of the following: a 2

–
3 of 45p b 3
–
7 of 140 cm c 4 × –53
a First find –13 of 45: 45 ÷ 3 = 15. So , –23 of 45p = 2 × 15 = 30p.
b First find –17 of 140: 140 ÷ 7 = 20. So, –37 of 140 cm = 3 × 20 = 60 cm.
c 4 × –53 = 12
–
–– 2
5 = 25
–

48
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 49

Example 4.10 Work out the equivalent fraction, decimal and/or percentage for each of the following.
9 3
a 0.14 b 0.55 c 66% d 45% e –
25 f –
8

a 14 = ––
0.14 = 14% = ––– 7 b 55 = 11
0.55 = 55% = ––– ––
100 50 100 20

c 66 = 33
66% = 0.66 = ––– –– d 45 = ––
45% = 0.45 = ––– 9
100 50 100 20

e 9 = –––
–– 36 = 36% = 0.36 f 3 = ––––
–– 37.5 = 37–1% = 0.375
2
25 100 8 100

Example 4.11 Work out: a 35% of 620 b 40% of 56

a 10% of 620 = 62, 5% of 620 = 31. So 35% of 620 = 62 + 62 + 62 + 31 = 217.
b 10% of 56 = 5.6. So, 40% of 56 = 4 × 5.6 = 22.4.

Exercise 4D Work out each of the following.

a
d
Half of twenty-four
A sixth of eighteen
b
e
A third of thirty-six
A fifth of thirty-five
c
f
A quarter of forty-four
An eighth of forty
6
Work out each of the following.
2 3 5 4
a 3 of 36 m b 4 of 44p c 6 of £18 d 5 of 35 kg
3 3 4 5
e 8 of 40 cm f 7 of 42 km g 9 of 36 mm h 6 of £24
3 7 7 9
i 10 of £1 j 8 of 84 m k 12 of 48 cm l 10 of 55 km

Work out each of these. Convert to mixed numbers or cancel down to lowest terms.
a 5× 2
3 b 3× 3
4 c 4× 3
8 d 6× 2
9

e 8× 5
6 f 4× 7
12 g 5× 3
7 h 4× 3
10

Calculate:
a 10% of 240 b 35% of 460 c 60% of 150 d 40% of 32
e 15% of 540 f 20% of 95 g 45% of 320 h 5% of 70
i 75% of 280 j 10% of 45 k 30% of 45

Work out the equivalent percentage and fraction to each of these decimals.
a 0.3 b 0.44 c 0.65 d 0.8 e 0.78
f 0.27 g 0.05 h 0.16 i 0.96 j 0.25

Work out the equivalent decimal and fraction to each of these percentages.
a 35% b 70% c 48% d 40% e 64%
f 31% g 4% h 75% i 18% j 110%

Work out the equivalent percentage and decimal to each of these fractions.
2 7 9 17 1
a 25 b 50 c 10 d 20 e 8
3 17
f 5 g 25 h 1 34 i 1
10 j 19
20

49
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 50

Write down the equivalent decimal and percentage to each of these.

6 a 1
3 b 2
3

As a decimal, a fraction and a percentage are all different ways of writing the
same thing, we can sometimes make a calculation easier by using an equivalent
form instead of the decimal, fraction or percentage given.
Example 1: 20% of 35. As 20% is 51 , this is the same as 1
5 × 35 = 7.
Example 2: 0.3 × 340. As 0.3 is 30%, this is the same as 30% of 340. 10% of 340 is 34.
So, 30% of 340 is 3 × 34 = 102.
Example 3: 3
25 of 40. As 3
25 is 0.12, this is the same as 0.12 × 40 = 4.8.
Rewrite the following using an alternative to the percentage, decimal or
fraction given. Then work out the answer.
2
a 20% of 75 b 25 of 60 c 25% of 19 d 60% of 550
e 3
20 of 90 f 0.125 × 64 g 3
5 of 7 h 0.4 × 270
i 75% of 44 j 0. 3333 × 180

Solving problems
Mrs Bountiful decided to give £10 000 to her grandchildren, nieces and nephews. She
gave –15 to her only grandson, 1–8 to each of her two granddaughters, –
1
10 to each of her three
1
nieces and – 20 to each of her four nephews. What was left she gave to charity. How much
did they each receive? What fraction of the £10 000 did she give to charity?
The best way to do this problem is to work with amounts of money rather than fractions.
The grandson gets 1–5 × £10 000 = £2000. Each granddaughter gets –18 × £10 000 = £1250.
10 × £10 000 = £1000. Each nephew gets 20 × £10 000 = £500.
1 1
Each niece gets – –

Altogether she gives away 2000 + 2 × (1250) + 3 × (1000) + 4 × (500) = £9500.

500 1
10 000 = 20.
This leaves £500. As a fraction of £10 000, this is –– –

Solve the problems in Exercise 4E. Show all your working and explain what you are doing.

Exercise 4E

A shop is taking 10% off all its prices. How much will these items cost after a 10%
reduction?
a Saucepan £16.00 b Spoon 60p c Coffee pot £5.80
d Bread maker £54.00 e Cutlery set £27.40 f Tea set £20.80

A company is offering its workers a 5% pay rise. How much will the salary of each of
the following people be after the pay rise?
a Fred the storeman £12 000 b Alice the office manager £25 000
c Doris the director £40 000 d John the driver £15 500

50
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 51

Another company is offering its workers a 4% or £700 per annum pay rise,
whichever is the greater. 6
What will the pay of the following people be after the pay rise?
a Alf the storeman £12 000
b Mark the office manager £25 000
c Joe the driver £15 500
d At what salary will a 4% pay rise be the same as a £700 pay rise?

Which of these is greater?

3 2 3 7 3 1
a 5 of 45 or 3 of 39? b 4 of 64 or 9 of 63? c 10 of 35 or 4 of 39?

There are 360 passengers on a Jumbo Jet. 1–4 of them are British, –25 of them are French,
1
– of them are German , –1
6 12 of them are Italian and the rest are Dutch. How many of
each nationality are there? What fraction of the passengers are Dutch?

Which of these dealers

is giving the better value?

4 24
15 and 9 are examples of three- digit fractions.
a There is only one three-digit fraction equal to 11–2. What is it?
b There are three three-digit fractions equal to 21–2, 31–2 and 41–2. Find them and
explain why there cannot be more than three equivalent three-digit fractions for
these numbers.
c In the series of fractions 2–12, 3–12, 4 –12, 5–12, …, the last one that has three equivalent
three-digit fractions is 16 –12. Explain why.

1 – 2 – 3 4 54
54, 54, 54,
There are 54 fractions in the sequence: – 54,
– …, –
54. How many of them will
not cancel down to a simpler form?

What number is halfway between the two numbers shown on each scale?
a b c
1 5 1 9
6 9 10 20 141 2 38

51
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 52

3 I can recognise and use simple fractions.

I can recognise when two simple fractions are equivalent.

4 I can recognise approximate proportions of a whole.

I can add and subtract simple fractions and those with the same denominator.

5 I can understand equivalent fractions, decimals and percentages.

I can calculate fractions of a quantity.
I can multiply a fraction by an integer.

6 I can convert between fractions, decimals and percentages.

I can add and subtract some mixed fractions.

1 2005 4–6 Paper 1

4 Here are four fractions.

3 1 1 3
4 8 3 5

Look at the number line below.

Write each fraction in the correct box.
0 0.5 1

2 2000 Paper 1
A pupil recorded how much rain fell on 5 different days. Amount in cm
a Copy the statements and fill in the gaps with the correct day Monday 0.2
Tuesday 0.8
The most rain fell on ……………………..
Wednesday 0.5
The least rain fell on …………………….. Thursday 0.25
b How much more rain fell on Wednesday than on Thursday? Friday 0.05

c How much rain fell altogether on Monday, Tuesday and Wednesday?

Now write your answer in millimetres.

52
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 53

3 2001 Paper 1

a Look at these fractions: 1

–
2
1
–
3
5
–
6

Copy the number line and mark each fraction on it.

0
1
–
1 4
2

The first one has been done for you.

b Copy the fractions and fill in the missing numbers.

2 = 1 1 = 2 12 = 6
12 6 2 24
1 1

4 2003 Paper 1
Fill in the missing numbers.
1 1
2 of 20 = 4 of ...
3 1
4 of 100 = 2 of ...
1 2
3 of 60 = 3 of ...

5 2001 Paper 1

Shape A Shape B Shape C Shape D

a What fraction of shape A is shaded?

b What percentage of shape B is shaded?

c Which of shape C or shape D has the greater percentage shaded or are they both
the same?
Explain how you know.

53
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 54

CHAPTER 5 Statistics 1
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to calculate the mode, the How to interpret data from
median, the mean and the tables, graphs and charts
range for a set of data How to draw line graphs,
How to interpret statistical frequency tables and bar charts
diagrams and charts
How to use the probability scale
How to collect data from
experiments and calculate
probabilities

Mode, median and range

Statistics is concerned with the collection and organisation of data, the representation of
data on diagrams and the interpretation of data.
When interpreting data we often need to find an average. For example: the average
rainfall in Britain, the average age a mother has her first child, the average weekly wage,
the average mark in an examination.
An average is a useful statistic because it represents a whole set of values by just a single
or typical value. This section explains how to find two types of average: the mode and the
median. It also explains how to find the range of a set of values.
The mode is the value that occurs most often in a set of data. It is the only average that
can be used for non-numerical data. Sometimes there may be no mode because either all
the values are different, or no single value occurs more often than other values. For
grouped data, a mode cannot be found, so, instead, we find the modal class.
The median is the middle value for a set of values when they are put in numerical order. It
is often used when one value in the set of data is much larger or much smaller than the
rest. This value is called a rogue value.
The range of a set of values is the largest value minus the smallest value. A small range
means that the values in the set of data are similar in size, whereas a large range means
that the values differ a lot and therefore are more spread out.

Example 5.1 Here are the ages of 11 players in a football squad. Find the mode, median and range.
23, 19, 24, 26, 27, 27, 24, 23, 20, 23, 26
First, put the ages in order: 19, 20, 23, 23, 23, 24, 24, 26, 26, 27, 27
The mode is the number which occurs most often. So, the mode is 23.
The median is the number in the middle of the set. So, the median is 24.
The range is the largest number minus the smallest number: 27 – 19 = 8. The range is 8.

54
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 55

Example 5.2 Below are the marks of ten pupils in a mental arithmetic test. Find the mode,
median and range.
19, 18, 16, 15, 13, 14, 20, 19, 18, 15
First, put the marks in order: 13, 14, 15, 15, 16, 18, 18, 19, 19, 20
There is no mode because no number occurs more often than the others.
There are two numbers in the middle of the set: 16 and 18. The median is the
number in the middle of these two numbers. So, the median is 17.
The range is the largest number minus the smallest number: 20 – 13 = 7. The range is 7.

Exercise 5A Find the mode of each of the following sets of data.

a
b
red, white, blue, red, white, blue, red, blue, white, red
rain, sun, cloud, fog, rain, sun, snow, cloud, snow, sun, rain, sun
4
c E, A, I, U, E, O, I, E, A, E, A, O, I, U, E, I, E
d ♠, ♣, ❤, ♦, ♣, ♠, ❤, ♣, ♦, ❤, ♣, ❤, ♦, ❤

Find the mode of each of the following sets of data.

a 7, 6, 2, 3, 1, 9, 5, 4, 8, 4, 5, 5
b 36, 34, 45, 28, 37, 40, 24, 27, 33, 31, 41, 34, 40, 34
c 14, 12, 18, 6, 10, 20, 16, 8, 13, 14, 13
d 99, 101, 107, 103, 109, 102, 105, 110, 100, 98, 101, 95, 104

Find the range of each of the following sets of data.

a 23, 37, 18, 23, 28, 19, 21, 25, 36
b 3, 1, 2, 3, 1, 0, 4, 2, 4, 2, 6, 5, 4, 5
c 51, 54, 27, 28, 38, 45, 39, 50
d 95, 101, 104, 92, 106, 100, 97, 101, 99

Find the mode and range of each set of data.

a £2.50 £1.80 £3.65 £3.80 £4.20 £3.25 £1.80
b 23 kg, 18 kg, 22 kg, 31 kg, 29 kg, 32 kg
c 132 cm, 145 cm, 151cm, 132 cm, 140 cm, 142 cm
d 32°, 36°, 32°, 30°, 31°, 31°, 34°, 33°, 32°, 35°

A group of nine Year 7 students had their lunch in the school cafeteria.
Given below is the amount that each of them spent.
£2.30 £2.20 £2.00 £2.50 £2.20
£2.90 £3.60 £2.20 £2.80
a Find the mode for the data.
b Find the range for the data.

55
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 56

Find the median of each of the following sets of data.

a 8, 7, 3, 4, 2, 10, 6, 5, 9
b 30, 28, 39, 22, 31, 34, 18, 21, 27, 25, 35
c 16, 14, 20, 8, 12, 22, 18, 10
d 100, 101, 108, 104, 110, 103, 106, 111, 101, 99

Find the mode, range and median of each set of data.

a £3.60, £2.90, £4.75, £4.90, £5.30, £4.35, £2.90
b 20 kg, 15 kg, 19 kg, 28 kg, 28 kg, 23 kg, 29 kg
c 121 cm, 134 cm, 140 cm, 121 cm, 129 cm, 131 cm, 121 cm
d 44°, 48°, 44°, 42°, 43°, 44°, 46°, 45°, 45°, 47°, 46°

a Write down a list of seven numbers which has a median of 10 and a mode of 12.
b Write down a list of eight numbers which has a median of 10 and a mode of 12.
c Write down a list of seven numbers which has a median of 10, a mode of 12 and
a range of 8.

Surveys
Carry out a survey for any of the following. For each one, collect your data
on a survey sheet, find the modal category and draw diagrams to illustrate
your data.
1 The most popular mobile phone network in your class.
2 The most common letter in a page of text.
3 The favourite TV soap opera of students in your class.

The mean
The mean is the most commonly used average. It is also called the mean average or
simply the average. The mean can be used only with numerical data.
The mean of a set of values is the sum of all the values divided by the number of values in
the set. That is:
Sum of all–––––––
Mean = ––––––––––– values
Number of values
The mean is a useful statistic because it takes all values into account, but it can be
distorted by rogue values.

Example 5.3 Find the mean of 2, 7, 9, 10.

2 + 7 + 9 + 10 = 28
Mean = ––––––––––––– –– = 7
4 4

For more complex data, we can use a calculator. When the answer is not exact, the mean
is usually given to one decimal place (1 dp).

56
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 57

Example 5.4 The ages of seven people are 40, 37, 34, 42, 45, 39, 35. Calculate their mean age.
40 + 37 + 34 + 42 + 45 +39 + 35 = ––––
Mean age = –––––––––––––––––––––––––––––– 272 = 38.9 (1dp)
7 7

Exercise 5B Complete the following.

a 3 + 5 + 10 = –– =
Mean of 3, 5, 10 = ––––––––––
3 3
b 2 + 5 + 6 + 7 = –– =
Mean of 2, 5, 6, 7 = ––––––––––––
4 4
c Mean of 1, 4, 8, 11 = 1 + 4 + 8 + 11 = –– =
–––––––––––––
4 4
d 1 + 1 + 2 + 3 + 8 = –– =
Mean of 1, 1, 2, 3, 8 = ––––––––––––––––
5 5

Complete the following.

5 + 6 + 10
a Mean of 5, 6, 10 = –––––––––– = –– =
3
b 1 + 3 + 3 + 5 = –– =
Mean of 1, 3, 3, 5 = ––––––––––––
4
c 3 + 4 + 5 + 6 + 8 = –– =
Mean of 3, 4, 5, 5, 8 = ––––––––––––––––
5
d 1 + 2 + 2 + 5 + 10 = –– =
Mean of 1, 2, 2, 5, 10 = –––––––––––––––––
5

Complete the following.

a 1 + 5 + 6 = –– =
Mean of 1, 5, 6 = –––––––––

b 1 + 4 + 7 + 8 = –– =
Mean of 1, 4, 7, 8 = ––––––––––––

c 2 + 2 + 3 + 6 + 7 = –– =
Mean of 2, 2, 3, 6, 7 = ––––––––––––––––

d 4 + 6 + 10 + 20 = –– =
Mean of 4, 6, 10, 20 = –––––––––––––––

Complete the following.

a Mean of 3, 7, 8 = ––––––––– = –– =

b Mean of 5, 8, 10, 17 = –––––––––––– = –– =

c Mean of 2, 4, 11, 13, 15 = –––––––––––––––– = –– =

d Mean of 1, 1, 8, 8 = ––––––––––––– = –– =

57
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 58

Find the mean of each of the following sets of data.

a 8, 7, 6, 10, 4 b 23, 32, 40, 37, 29, 25
c 11, 12, 9, 26, 14, 17, 16 d 2.4, 1.6, 3.2, 1.8, 4.2, 2.5, 4.5, 2.2

Find the mean of each of the following sets of data, giving your answer to 1 dp.
a 6, 7, 6, 4, 2, 3 b 12, 15, 17, 11, 18, 16, 14
c 78, 72, 82, 95, 47, 67, 77, 80 d 9.1, 7.8, 10.3, 8.5, 11.6, 8.9

The heights, in centimetres, of ten children are:

132, 147, 143, 136, 135, 146, 153, 132, 137, 149
a Find the mean height of the children.
b Find the median height of the children.
c Find the modal height of the children.
d Which average do you think is the best one to use? Explain your answer.

The numbers of children in the families of a class are:

1,1,1,1,1,1, 2, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 3, 4
a Find the mode.
b Find the median.
c Find the mean.

The shoe sizes of all the girls in class 7JS are:

3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 6, 6
a Find the mode.
b Find the median.
c Find the mean.

1 Vital statistics
Working in groups, calculate the mean for the group’s age, height and weight.
2 Average score
Throw a dice ten times. Record your results on a survey sheet. What is the
mean score?
Repeat the experiment but throw the dice 20 times. What is the mean score now?
Repeat the experiment but throw the dice 50 times. What is the mean score now?
Write down anything you notice as you throw the dice more times.

58
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 59

Statistical diagrams
Once data has been collected from a survey, it can be displayed in various ways to make
it easier to understand and interpret.
The most common ways to display data are bar charts, pie charts and line graphs.
Bar charts have several different forms. The questions in Exercise 5C will show you the
different types of bar chart that can be used. Notice that data which has single categories
gives a bar chart with gaps between the bars. Grouped data gives a bar chart with no gaps
between the bars.
Pie charts are used to show data when you do not need to know the number of items in
each category of the sample. Pie charts are used to show proportions.
Line graphs are usually used to show trends and patterns in the data.

Exercise 5C The bar chart shows how the pupils

in class 7PB travel to school.
16
14 4

Number of pupils
a How many pupils walk to school? 12
10
b What is the mode for the way the
pupils travel to school? 8
6
c How many pupils are there in class
4
7PB?
2
0
Walk Taxi Bus Car

The bar chart shows the way the pupils of two Year 7 classes voted for their favourite
soap opera.
16

14

12
Number of pupils

10

0
Emmerdale Neighbours EastEnders Hollyoaks Coronation
Street

a How many voted for EastEnders?

b Which was the overall favourite of the two classes?
c What is the modal choice?
d Which of the two soaps had the same number of votes?

59
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 60

The pictogram shows the amount of money collected for charity by different year
4 groups in a school.

Year 7 £20 £20 £20 £20 £20

Year 8 £20 £20 £20
Year 9 £20 £20 £20 £20 £20
Year 10 £20 £20 £20 £20
Year 11 £20 £20 £20
Key
a How much money was collected by Year 8? represents £20
£20
b How much money was collected by Year 10?
c Which year group collected the most money?
d How much money was collected altogether?

The pictogram shows

how many CDs five pupils Ben
have in their collection.
a Who has the most CDs? Ceri
b How many CDs does
Jessica have? Dipesh
c How many CDs does Ceri
have? Jessica
d How many more CDs does
Dipesh have than Tania? Tania Key
e How many CDs do the five represents
pupils have altogether? 4 CDs

The dual bar chart shows the daily average number of hours of sunshine in London
and Edinburgh over a year.
10
London
9
Edinburgh
8
Number of hours

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

a Which city has the most sunshine?

b Which month is the sunniest for i London ii Edinburgh?
c What is the range for the number of hours of sunshine over the year for
i London ii Edinburgh?

60
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 61

The line graph shows the temperature, in °C, in Leeds over a 12-hour period.
20
4
18
16

Temperature (°C)
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
0
6:00 am 8:00 am 10:00 am 12 noon 2:00 pm 4:00 pm 6:00 pm
Time

a What is the temperature at midday?

b What is the temperature at 3 pm?
c Write down the range for the temperature over the 12-hour period.
d Explain why the line graph is a useful way of showing the data.

The percentage compound bar chart shows the favourite colours for a sample of
Year 7 pupils.
blue
red
yellow
green
purple
orange
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100

a Which is the colour preferred by most pupils?

b What percentage of the pupils preferred yellow?
c Which two colours were equally preferred by the pupils?
d If there were 40 pupils in the sample, how many of them preferred red?
e Explain why the compound bar chart is a useful way to illustrate the data.

The bar chart shows the 14

marks obtained in a 12
mathematics test by the 10
Frequency

pupils in class 7KG. 8

a How many pupils 6
are there in class 4
7KG? 2
b What is the modal 0
class for the data? 1–20 21–40 41–60 61–80 81–100
Mark
c How many pupils
got a mark over 60?
d Write down the smallest and greatest range of marks possible for the data.

61
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 62

The pie chart shows the TV channel that 60 people in a survey most often watched.
BBC 1
Sky One

BBC 2

Channel 5

Channel 4
ITV

a Which is the most popular channel?

b Which is the least popular channel?

Statistics in the press

Look through newspapers and magazines to find as many statistical diagrams
as you can. Make a display to show the variety of diagrams used in the press.
What types of diagram are most common? How effective are the diagrams in
showing the information?
Are any of the diagrams misleading? If they are, explain why.

Statistics in other areas

Do other subject areas in school make use of statistical diagrams?
Find examples in textbooks from other subjects to show where statistical
diagrams are used most effectively.

Probability
Probability is the way of describing and measuring the chance or likelihood that an event
will happen.
The chance of an event happening can be shown on a probability scale:
c a b

Impossible Very Unlikely Evens Likely Very Certain

unlikely likely

An evens chance is often referred to as ‘a 50–50 chance’. Other everyday words used to
describe probability are: uncertain, possible, probable, good chance, poor chance.

62
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 63

Example 5.5 The following events are shown on the probability scale on page 62.
a The probability that a new-born baby will be a girl.
b The probability that a person is right-handed.
c The probability that it will rain tomorrow.

To measure probability, we use a scale from 0 to 1. So probabilities are written as

fractions or decimals, and sometimes as percentages, as in the weather forecasts.
The probability scale is now drawn as:

1
0 —
2 1
Impossible Evens Certain

We define the probability of an event happening as:

Number of outcomes in the event
P(event) = ––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––––
Total number of all possible outcomes

Example 5.6 When tossing a fair coin, there are two possible outcomes:
Head (H) or Tail (T)
Each outcome is equally likely to happen because it is a fair coin. So:
P E
N
P(H) = –12 and P(T) = –12
O

TW

C
E
2
This is the probability fraction for the event.
(Sometimes, people may say a 1 in 2 chance or a 50–50 chance).

Example 5.7 When throwing a fair dice, there are six equally likely outcomes: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6
So, for example: P(6) = –16 and P(1 or 2) = 2
–
6 = 1
–
3

Probability fractions are always cancelled down.

Exercise 5D Choose one of the following words which best describes the probability for the
events listed below. 4
impossible, very unlikely, unlikely, evens, likely, very likely, certain
a Manchester United will win their next home game.
b Someone in your town will win the National Lottery this week.
c You have a maths lesson today.
d When throwing a dice, the score is an odd number.
e You will live to be 200.
f You will watch TV this evening.
g It will snow on Christmas Day this year.

63
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 64

Copy the probability scale shown below:

4
Impossible Very Unlikely Evens Likely Very Certain
unlikely likely

Place the following events onto the above probability scale:

A You will be Prime Minister one day.
B You will have some homework this week.
C You can swim to the Moon.
D If you flip a coin, you will get ‘heads’.
E You will sit down today.
F It will snow in May.
G If you roll a die, you will get a number bigger than 2.

Cards numbered 1 to 10 are placed in a box. A card is drawn at random from the
box. Find the probability that the card drawn is:
a 5 b an even number c a number in the 3 times table
d 4 or 8 e a number less than 12 f an odd number

Adam picks a card at random from a normal pack of 52 playing cards. Find each of
the following probabilities.
a P(a Jack) b P(a Heart) c P(a picture card)
d P(Ace of Spades) e P(a 9 or a 10) f P(Ace)

A bag contains five red discs, three blue discs and two green discs. Linda takes out a
disc at random. Find the probability that she takes out:
a a red disc b a blue disc c a green disc
d a yellow disc e a red or blue disc

Syed is using a fair, eight-sided spinner in a game. 0

Find the probability that the score he gets is: 1 3
0 2
a 0 b 1 c 2 d 3
1 0
2

a Write down five events that have a probability of 0.

b Write down five events that have a probability of 1.

Sandhu rolls a fair dice. Find each of the following probabilities.

a P(3) b P(odd number) c P(5 or 6)
d P(even number) e P(6) f P(1 or 6)

Mr Evans has a box of 25 calculators, but 5 of them do not work very well.
What is the probability that the first calculator taken out of the box at random does
not work very well?
Write your fraction as simply as possible.

64
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 65

At the start of a tombola, there are 300 tickets inside the

drum. There are 60 winning tickets available.
What is the probability that the first ticket taken out of
the drum is a winning ticket? Write your fraction as
simply as possible.

You will need a set of cards numbered 1 to 10 for this experiment.

Line up the cards, face down and in random order.
1 Turn over the first card.
2 Work out the probability that the second card will be higher than the first card.
3 Work out the probability that the second card will be lower than the first card.
4 Turn over the second card.
5 Work out the probability that the third card will be higher than the second card.
6 Work out the probability that the third card will be lower than the second card.
7 Carry on the process. Write down all your results clearly and explain any
patterns that you notice.
Repeat the experiment. Are your results the same?

Experimental probability
The probabilities in the previous section were calculated using equally likely outcomes.
A probability worked out this way is known as a theoretical probability.
Sometimes, a probability can be found only by carrying out a series of experiments and
recording the results in a frequency table. The probability of the event can then be estimated
from these results. A probability found in this way is known as an experimental probability.
To find an experimental probability, the experiment has to be repeated a number of times.
Each separate experiment carried out is known as a trial.
Number of times the event
Experimental probability of an event = –––––––––––––––––––––––––– occurs
––––––––
Total number of trials
It is important to remember that when an experiment is repeated, the experimental
probability will be slightly different each time. The experimental probability of an event is
an estimate for the theoretical probability. As the number of trials increases, the value of
the experimental probability gets closer to the theoretical probability.

Example 5.8 A dice is thrown 50 times. The results of the 50 trials are shown in a frequency table.

Score 1 2 3 4 5 6
Frequency 8 9 8 10 7 8

8 = ––
The experimental probability of getting a 3 = –– 4.
50 25

65
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 66

4 Exercise 5E Working in pairs, toss a coin 50 times and record your results in a table such as the
following frequency table.

Tally Frequency
Head
Tail

a Use your results to find the experimental probability of getting a Head.

b What is the experimental probability of getting a Tail?

Working in pairs, throw a dice 100 times and record your results in a table such as
the following frequency table.

Score Tally Frequency

1
2
3
4
5
6

a Find the experimental probability of getting 6.

b Find the experimental probability of getting an even score.

Working in pairs, drop a drawing pin 50 times. Copy and record

your results in a table such as the following frequency table.

Tally Frequency
Point up
Point down

a What is the experimental probability that the drawing pin will land point up?
b Is your answer greater or less than an evens chance?
c Explain what would happen if you repeated the experiment.

a Working in pairs, take 4 playing cards, one of each suit (♣,♦,♥,♠). Shuffle them.
Look at the suit of the top card and complete the following frequency table:

Suit Tally Frequency

Clubs ♣
Diamonds ♦
Hearts ♥
Spades ♠
Total

66
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 67

Shuffle after every turn and try to complete about 100 shuffles.
b
c
Find your experimental probability of having the top card a heart.
Find your experimental probability of having the top card a black suit.
4
Biased spinners
Make a six-sided spinner from card and a cocktail stick.
3
1 5 Weight it by sticking a small piece of Plasticine below one of the numbers on the
2 6 card. This will make the spinner unfair or biased.
4
Roll the spinner 60 times and record the scores in a frequency table.
Find the experimental probability for each score.
Compare your results with what you would expect from a fair, six-sided spinner.
Repeat the experiment by making a spinner with a different number of sides.

4 I can collect data using a frequency table.

I can find the mode and range for a set of data.
I can read and interpret statistical diagrams.
I can find simple probability.

5 I can find the mean and median for a set of data.

I can find the mean from a frequency table.
I can interpret pie charts.
I can calculate probabilities using equally likely outcomes.
I can calculate probability from experimental data.

67
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 68

1 2007 4–6 Paper 2

4 These are the names of the twelve people who work for a company.
Ali Claire Kiki Suki
Brian Claire Lucy Tom
Claire James Ryan Tom

a What name is the mode?

b One person leaves the company. A different person joins the company.
Now the name that is the mode is Tom.
Complete the following sentences, writing in the missing names.
The name of the person who leaves is ……
The name of the person who joins is ……

2 2005 4–6 Paper 1

a There are two children in the Smith family.

The range of their ages is exactly 7 years.
What could the ages of the two children be?
Give an example.

b There are two children in the Patel family.

They are twins of the same age.
What is the range of their ages?
100%
Key Age in years
3 2000 Paper 2
50+
A newspaper predicts what 40 to 49
the ages of secondary
school teachers will be in 30 to 39
six years’ time. 50% 20 to 29
They print this chart.

0%
Male Female

a The chart shows 24% of male teachers will be aged 40 to 49.

About what percentage of female teachers will be aged 40 to 49?

b About what percentage of female teachers will be aged 50+?

c The newspaper predicts there will be about 20 000 male teachers aged 40 to 49.
Estimate the number of male teachers that will be aged 50+.

d Assume that the total number of male teachers will be about the same as the total number of female
teachers.

68
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 16:57 Page 69

Use the chart to decide which statement is correct.

Generally, male teachers will tend to be younger than female teachers.
Generally, female teachers will tend to be younger than male teachers.
Explain how you used the chart to decide.

4 2000 Paper 2
In each box of cereal there is a free gift of a card.
You cannot tell which card will be in a box. Each card is equally likely.
There are four different cards: A, B, C or D
A B C D
a Zoe needs card A.
Her brother Paul needs cards C and D.
They buy one box of cereal.
What is the probability that the card is one that Zoe needs?
What is the probability that the card is one that Paul needs?

b Then their mother opens the box. She tells them the card is not card A.
Now what is the probability the card is one that Zoe needs?
What is the probability that the card is one that Paul needs?

69
FM Ch 5 Sports Day PB 7.2 14/2/08 16:07 Page 70

Functional Maths

School sports day

Teams

1 Ruskin team has seven members

with the following ages:
Age (years)
Joe 14
Kristen 15
Simon 13
Vikas 15
Helen 14
Sarah 13
Quinn 13

a Put these ages into order.

b What is the mode of the ages?
c What is the range of the ages?
d What is the median age?

100 m sprint
2 The girls’ 100 m race was run in the following times:
Time (seconds)
Kate 22
Kerry 25
Maria 21
Oi Yin 25
Sara 23
a Put these times into order.
b What is the mode of the times?
c What is the range of the times?
d What is the median time?

70
FM Ch 5 Sports Day PB 7.2 14/2/08 16:07 Page 71

Long jump

3 Alex had ten practice attempts at the long jump.

The bar chart illustrates the range of lengths he
jumps.
Range of jumps
141–160 cm
121–140 cm
101–120 cm
1–100 cm

0 1 2 3 4 5
He is now prepared for his last long jump.
What is the probability that Alex jumps:
a in the 1–100 cm range?
b in the 121–140 cm range?

Rounders competition

4 In the rounders game between Huntsman and Chantry, the following

scorecards were produced as tallies. A tally was put next to a player each
time they scored a rounder.

Huntsman Frequency Chantry Frequency

Afzal llll ___ Ellen llll ___
Claire ll ___ Cynthia ll ___
Gilbert lll ___ Runuka llll l ___
John llll ll ___ Joanne ll ___
Ali l ___ Michael l ___
Izolda l ___ Emily ll ___
Kate lll ___ Julie llll ll ___
Joy llll llll l ___ Kay llll ___
Mari ll ___ Sue lll ___

a Which team won the game?

b Which of all the players was the most likely to score a rounder?

71
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:11 Page 72

CHAPTER 6 Algebra 2
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to use letters in place of Understand and be able to
numbers apply the rules of arithmetic
How to use the rules The meaning of the words term
(conventions) of algebra and expression
How to solve puzzles called
equations
How to solve problems using
algebra

Algebraic terms and expressions

In algebra, you will keep meeting three words: variable, term and expression.
Variable. This is the letter in a term or an expression whose value can vary. Some of the
letters most used for variables are x, y, n and t.
Term. This is an algebraic quantity which contains only a letter (or combination of letters)
and may contain a number. For example:
3n means 3 multiplied by the variable n
n
– means n divided by 2
2
n2 means n multiplied by itself (normally said as ‘n squared’)
Expression. This is a combination of letters (variables) and signs, often with numbers. For
example:
8–n means subtract n from 8
n–3 means subtract 3 from n
2n + 7 means n multiplied by 2 with 7 added on
When you give a particular value to the variable in an expression, the expression takes on
a particular value.
For example, if the variable n takes the value of 4, then the terms and expressions which
include this variable will have particular values, as shown below:
3n = 12 –– n = 2 n2 = 16 8 – n = 4 n – 3 = 1 2n + 7 = 15
2

Exercise 6A
4 Write terms, or expressions, to illustrate the following sentences.
a
d
Add four to m.
Multiply m by itself.
b Multiply t by eight.
e Divide n by five.
c
f
Nine minus y.
Subtract t from seven.
g Multiply n by three, then add five. h Multiply six by t.
i Multiply m by five, then subtract three. j Multiply x by x.

72
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:11 Page 73

Write down the values of each term for the three values of n.
a 4n
n
where i n=2 ii n=5 iii n = 11 4
b –– where i n=6 ii n = 14 iii n=8
2
c n2 where i n=3 ii n=6 iii n=7
d 3n where i n=7 ii n=5 iii n=9
e n
–– where i n = 10 ii n=5 iii n = 20
5
f 9n where i n=2 ii n=4 iii n=8
g n
–– where i n = 20 ii n = 50 iii n = 100
10

Write down the values of each expression for the three values of n.
a n+7 where i n=3 ii n=4 iii n = 12
b n–5 where i n=8 ii n = 14 iii n = 11
c 10 – n where i n=4 ii n=7 iii n=1
d 2n + 3 where i n=2 ii n=5 iii n=7
e 5n – 1 where i n=3 ii n=4 iii n=8
f 20 – 2n where i n=1 ii n=5 iii n=9
g 4n + 5 where i n=4 ii n=3 iii n=7

Write down the values of each expression for the three values of n.
a n2 – 1 where i n=2 ii n=3 iii n=4
b n2 + 1 where i n=5 ii n=6 iii n=7
c 5 + n2 where i n=8 ii n=9 iii n = 10
d n2 + 9 where i n=5 ii n=4 iii n=3
e 25 + n2 where i n=4 ii n=5 iii n=6

1 Using the variable n and the operations add, subtract, multiply, divide,
square, write down as many different expressions as you can that use:
a two operations b three operations
2 Choose any value for n, say 5, and see how many of these expressions
have the same value.

Rules of algebra
The rules (conventions) of algebra are the same rules that are used in arithmetic.
For example:
3+4=4+3 a+b=b+a
3×4=4×3 a × b = b × a or ab = ba
But remember, for example, that:
7–5≠5–7 a–b≠b–a
6÷3≠3÷6 a ≠ ––
–– b
b a

73
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:11 Page 74

From one fact, other facts can be stated. For example:

3+4=7 a + b = 10
gives 7 – 4 = 3 and 7 – 3 = 4 gives 10 – a = b and 10 – b = a
3 × 4 = 12 ab = 10
gives 12
–– = 4 and 12
–– = 3 gives 10
–– = b and 10
–– = a
3 4 a b

Exercise 6B
3 In each of the following clouds only two expressions are equal to each other. Write
down the equal pair.
a b
3+5 3–5 2+7 7–2
3×5 5+3 2×7 7÷2 2 ÷7
5÷3 5–3 7×2

c d
a+b a–b m+p m–p
a×b b+a m×p p÷m m÷p
b÷a b–a p×m

4 In each of the following lists, write down all the expressions that equal each other.
a 5 + 6, 5 × 6, 6 – 5, 6 × 5, 6 ÷ 5, 5 – 6, 6 + 5, 5 ÷ 6
b ab, a + b, b – a, ba , a/b, a – b, b/a, b + a, a ÷ b
c k × t, k + t, k/t, kt, k ÷ t, tk, t + k, t × k, k – t

Write down two more facts that are implied by each of the following statements.
a 2 + 8 = 10 b a+b=7 c 3 × 5 = 15 d ab = 24
e 3+k=9 f m+4=5 g 2n = 6 h 8 =7
–a

Show by the substitution of suitable numbers that:

a m+n=n+m b ab = ba c p–t≠t–p d m ≠ ––
–– n
n m

Show by the substitution of suitable numbers that:

a If a + b = 7 , then 7 – a = b b If ab = 12 , then a = 12
––
b

Show by the substitution of suitable numbers that:

a a+b+c=c+b+a b acb = abc = cba

If you know that a + b + c + d = 180, write down as many other expressions that
equal 180 as you can.

It is known that abcd = 100. Write down at least ten other expressions that must also
equal 100.

74
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:11 Page 75

1 Write down some values of a and b which make the following statement true.
a + b = ab
6
You will find only one pair of integers. There are lots of decimal numbers
to find, but each time try to keep one of the variables an integer.
2 Write down some values of a and b which make the following statement true.
a–b=— a
b
You will find only one pair of integers. There are lots of decimal numbers
to find, but each time try to keep one of the variables an integer.
3 Does (a + b) × (a – b) = a2 – b2 work for all values of a and b?

Simplifying expressions
If you add 2 cups to 3 cups, you get 5 cups.
In algebra, this can be represented as:
2c + 3c = 5c
The terms here are called like terms, because they are all multiples of c.
Only like terms can be added or subtracted to simplify an expression. Unlike terms
cannot be combined.
Check out these two boxes.

Examples of combining like terms Examples of unlike terms

3p + 4p = 7p 5t + 3t = 8t 2m + 3p
x+y
9w – 4w = 5w 12q – 5q = 7q
7 – 3y 5g + 2k
a + 3a + 7a = 11a
m – 3p
15m – 2m – m = 12m

Like terms can be combined even when they are mixed together with unlike terms.
For example:
2 apples and 1 pear added to 4 apples and 2 kiwis make 6 apples, 1 pear and
2 kiwis, or in algebra
2a + p + 4a + 2k = 6a + 2k + p

Examples of different sorts of like terms mixed together Note: You never write the
4t + 5m + 2m + 3t + m = 7t + 8m one in front of a variable. So,
5k + 4g – 2k – g = 3k + 3g g = 1g m = 1m

75
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:11 Page 76

There are many situations in algebra where there is a need to use brackets in expressions.
They keep things tidy! You can expand brackets, as shown in Examples 6.1 and 6.2. This
operation is also called multiplying out.

Example 6.1 Expand 3(a + 5).

This means that each term in the brackets is multiplied by the number outside the
brackets. This gives:
3 × a + 3 × 5 = 3a + 15

Example 6.2 Expand and simplify 2(3p + 4) + 3(4p + 1).

This means that each term in each pair of brackets is multiplied by the number
outside the brackets. This gives:
2 × 3p + 2 × 4 + 3 × 4p + 3 × 1
= 6p + 8 + 12p + 3
= 18p + 11

Exercise 6C
4 Simplify each of the following expressions.
a 4c + 2c b 6d + 4d c 7p – 5p d 2x + 6x + 3x
e 4t + 2t – t f 7m – 3m g q + 5q – 2q h a + 6a – 3a
i 4p + p – 2p j 2w + 3w – w k 4t + 3t – 5t l 5g – g – 2g

Simplify each of the following expressions.

a 2x + 2y + 3x + 6y b 4w + 6t – 2w – 2t c 4m + 7n + 3m – n
d 4x + 8y – 2y – 3x e 8 + 4x – 3 + 2x f 8p + 9 – 3p – 4
g 2y + 4x – 3 + x – y h 5d + 8c – 4c + 7 i 4f + 2 + 3d – 1 – 3f
j 8c + 7 – 7c – 4 k 2p + q + 3p – q l 3t + 9 – t

Expand each of the following expressions.

a 4(x + 5) b 2(3t + 4) c 5(3m + 1) d 4(3w – 2)
e 6(3m – 4) f 7(4q – 3) g 2(3x – 4) h 3(2t + 7)
i 7(3k + p – 2) j 4(3 – k + 2t) k 5(m – 3 + 6p) l 4(2 – 5k – 2m)

6 Expand and simplify each of the following expressions.

a 4(x + 5) + 3(x + 3) b 5(p + 7) + 3(p + 3)
c 3(w + 3) + 4(w – 2) d 6(d + 3) + 3(d – 5)
e 3(8p + 2) + 3(5p + 1) f 4(6m + 5) + 2(5m – 4)
g 5(3w + 7) + 2(2w – 1) h 7(3c + 2) + 2(5c – 4)
i 4(t + 6) + 3(4t – 1) j 5(3x + 2) + 4(3x – 2)

76
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:11 Page 77

When an expression contains brackets within brackets, first simplify the

expression within the innermost brackets. 6
Expand and simplify each of these.
a 2[3x + 5(x + 2 )] b 3[4y + 3(2y – 1)]
c 4{m + 2[m + (m – 1)]} d 5{2(t + 1) + 3[4t + 3(2t – 1)]}

Formulae
Where you have a rule to calculate some quantity, you can write the rule as a formula.

Example 6.3 A rule to calculate the cost of hiring a hall for a wedding is £200 plus £6 per person.
This rule, written as a formula, is:
where c = cost in £
c = 200 + 6n
n = number of people

Example 6.4 Use the formula c = 200 + 6n to calculate the cost of a wedding with 70 people.
Cost = 200 + 6 × 70 = 200 + 420 = £620

Exercise 6D

Write each of these rules as a formula. Use the first letter of each variable in the
formula. (Each letter is printed in red.)
a The cost of hiring a boat is £2 per hour.
b Dad’s age is always Joy’s age plus 40.

A cleaner uses the formula:

where c = cost in £
c = 3 + 2h
h = number of hours worked
Calculate what the cleaner charges to work for:
a 5 hours b 3 hours c 8 hours

A mechanic uses the formula:

where c = cost in £
c = 8 + 5t
t = time, in hours, to complete the work
Calculate what the mechanic charges to complete the work in:
a 1 hour b 3 hours c 7 hours

A singer uses the formula:

where c = cost in £
c = 25 + 15s
s = number of songs sung
Calculate what the singer charges to sing the following:
a 2 songs b 4 songs c 8 songs

77
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:11 Page 78

The formula for the average speed of a car is:

where A = average speed (miles per hour)
A=D÷T
D = distance travelled (miles)
T = time taken (hours)
Use the formula to calculate the average speed for the following journeys.
a 300 miles in 6 hours b 200 miles in 5 hours
c 120 miles in 3 hours d 350 miles in 5 hours

The formula for the cost of a newspaper advert is:

where C = charge in £
C = 5W + 10A
W = number of words used
A = area of the advert in cm2
Use the formula to calculate the charge for the following adverts.
a 10 words with an area of 20 cm 2 b 8 words with an area of 6 cm 2
c 12 words with an area of 15 cm 2 d 17 words with an area of 15 cm 2

A three-tier set of number bricks looks like this: 21

9 12
5 4 8
The numbers on two adjacent bricks are added to create the number on the
brick above them.
a Find the top brick value when the bottom bricks, in order, are:
i 6, 7 and 10 ii a, b and a iii a + 1, a + 2 and a + 3
b If the bottom three bricks are a, b and c, write a formula for the total in
the top brick.
c The top number is 10. Each bottom brick is a different positive number.
How many different combinations of bottom brick numbers are there?

Equations
An equation states that two things are equal. These can be two expressions or an
expression and a quantity.
An equation can be represented by a pair of scales.
When the scales balance, both sides are equal.
The left-hand pan has three bags, each containing
the same number of marbles.
The right-hand pan has 15 marbles.
How many marbles are there in each bag?
Let the number of marbles in each bag be x, which gives 3x = 15.
3x 15
Divide both sides by 3. 3 = 3

There are 5 marbles in each bag. x=5

78
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:11 Page 79

Simple equations are solved by adding, subtracting, multiplying and dividing each side to
find the value of x.

Example 6.5 Solve x + 5 = 9

Subtract 5 from both sides x + 5 – 5 = 9 – 5

x=4

Example 6.6 Solve –3x = 5

Multiply both sides by 3 x = 3 × 5

x = 15

Exercise 6E Solve each of the following equations.

a 2x = 10 b 3x = 18 c 5x = 15 d 4x = 8 4
e 3m = 12 f 5m = 30 g 7m = 14 h 4m = 20
i 6k = 12 j 5k = 25 k 3k = 27 l 2k = 16
m 7x = 21 n 4x = 28 o 5x = 40 p 9x = 54

Solve each of the following equations.

a x+2=7 b x+3=9 c x + 8 = 10 d x+1=5
e m+3=7 f m–3=5 g k–2=9 h p–5=9
i k + 7 = 15 j k–1=3 k m+3=9 l x–3=7
m x+8=9 n n–2=6 o m–5=8 p x + 12 = 23

Solve each of the following equations.

a 2x = 5 b 4x = 7 c x
3 = 11 d x
5 =6
x x x x
e 5 =8 f 2 =6 g 8 =3 h 9 = 10
x x x x
i 3 = 11 j 7 =3 k 5 =9 l 2 = 16
x x x x
m 10 =3 n 8 =8 o 2 = 20 p 9 =9

Solve each of the following equations.

a x + 23 = 35 b x + 13 = 21 c x + 18 = 30 d x + 48 = 54
e m + 44 = 57 f m – 13 = 4 g k – 12 = 6 h p – 15 = –9
i k + 72 = 95 j k – 12 = –5 k m + 33 = 49 l x – 13 = –8
m x + 85 = 112 n n – 21 = –10 o m – 15 = –9 p x + 12 = 37

The solution to each of these equations is a whole number between 1 and 9 inclusive.
Try to find the value.
a 2(3x + 5) = 34 b 4(2x – 3) = 52 c 5(3x – 1) = 40
d 3(4x – 7) = 15 e 2(3x – 4) = 16 f 4(5x – 2) = 52
g 5(2x – 1) = 25 h 3(5x + 2) = 66 i 2(3x – 2) = 20

79
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:11 Page 80

3 I can write a simple algebraic expression for a rule such as 4 more than x, i.e. x + 4.
I can recognise equivalent numerical and algebraic expressions such as 4 x + 7 = 27 when x = 5.

4 I can substitute numbers into algebraic expressions such as n 2 + 3, e.g. when n = 5, n 2 + 3 = 28.
I can find equivalent algebraic expressions for expressions such as 3 x + 2x and 7x – 2x.
I can simplify algebraic expressions such as 2a + 5a by collecting like terms, i.e. 7a.

5 I can find equivalent algebraic expressions for expressions such as 4( x – 2) and 2(2 x – 4).
I can expand a simple expression containing a bracket such as 3( x – 1) = 3x – 3.
I can find, substitute into and use formulae describing real-life situations such as the cost of a taxi
fare as c = 5 + 2m, which is £11 when m = 3.
I can solve simple equations involving one operation such as 2 x = 12, giving x = 6.

6 I can expand and simplify expressions with more than one bracket such as
3( x + 2) + 4( x – 1) = 3 x + 6 + 4x – 4 = 7x + 2.

1 2005 4–6 Paper 2

Look at this algebra grid: 2a 3a 4a
+ +

5a 7a
+

12a

Copy and complete the algebra grids below, simplifying each expression.

6k 2k k 2a + 3b 4a + 2b
+ + + +

7a + 5b
+ +

80
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:11 Page 81

2 2005 4–6 Paper 1

Complete the statements below:
When x is 8, 4x is ...
When x is ..., 4x is 48
When x is 8, ... is 48

3 2005 5–7 Paper 1

Solve these equations.
3y + 1 = 16 y = ...
18 = 4k + 6 k = ...

81
FM Ch 6 Skiing PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:48 Page 82

Functional Maths

Skiing trip

Use the information in the key to answer the following questions.

On-line Ski Hire Prices

Minimum rental 2 days.
Prices shown are for 2 days’ and 8 days’ hire.
Prices include boots.
All other days are pro-rata.
20% deposit required when ordering.

ADULTS 2 days 8 days

Platinum Saloman Crossmax W12 – or equivalent €52.32 €192.72
Gold Rossignol Radical 8S ou 8X Oversize – or equivalent €46.72 €171.94
Silver Saloman Aero RT– or equivalent €37.60 €138.40
CHILDREN 2 days 8 days
Junior Surf Dynastar Starlett Teen– or equivalent €26.56 €97.84
Junior Ski Saloman X-wing fury Junior– or equivalent €16.16 €59.42
Kid Dynastar My First Dynastar– or equivalent €12.16 €44.74

1 Mr Khan, Mrs Khan, their son

Rafiq and their daughter Sufia
hire skis for 8 days. Mr Khan
hires a pair of Saloman
Crossmax W12, Mrs Khan hires
a pair of Saloman Aero RT, Rafiq
hires a pair of Dynastar Starlett
Teen and Sufia hires a pair of
Saloman X-wing Fury Junior.
What is their total bill?

2 The hire company allows a 25% discount per person for

groups of 8 or more people. A party of 12 friends take a
skiing trip for 8 days. They all go for the Adult ‘Platinum’ deal.
a What is the cost of this deal with the discount?
b How much will the 12 friends pay altogether?

82
FM Ch 6 Skiing PB 7.2 14/2/08 14:48 Page 83

3 To work out the cost per day

subtract the 2-day hire price from
the 8-day hire price and divide by 6.
For example, for the ‘Platinum’ deal
(192.72 – 52.32) ÷ 6 = 23.40.
Work out the cost per day for:
a Adult ‘Gold’ deal
b Children’s ‘Junior Ski’ deal.
c Explain why 6 days’ hire for the
Adult ‘Gold’ deal would cost
€130.20.

4 Mr Smith hires some

Saloman Crossmax
W12 skis for 8 days.
He pays £50 as a
deposit. The exchange
rate is £1 = €1.38.
How many more
Euros will he have
to pay?

5 Colne Valley High School take a party skiing for

6 days. The bill for ski hire is shown below.
Complete the bill.

Invoice for Colne Valley

Number of rentals Type of ski Rate Total cost
11 Junior Surf
9 Junior Ski
10 Kid
3 Platinum
2 Gold 130.20
Total hire cost
Less 10% discount
Less £600 deposit @ 1.42
Total less discount and dep
osit

83
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:18 Page 84

CHAPTER 7 Geometry and Measures 2

This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
The vocabulary and notation for The geometric properties of
lines and angles triangles and quadrilaterals
How to use angles at a point, How to plot coordinates in the
angles on a straight line, angles first quadrant
in a triangle and vertically
opposite angles
How to use coordinates in all
four quadrants

Lines and angles

Lines A straight line can be considered to have infinite length.

A line segment has finite length.

A B
The line segment AB has two end points, one at A and the other at B.
Two lines lie in a plane, which is a flat surface.
Two lines are either parallel or intersect.

Parallel lines never meet. These two lines intersect at a point X. These two lines intersect at right angles.
The lines are said to be perpendicular.

Angles When two lines meet at a point, they form an angle. An angle is a measure of rotation
and is measured in degrees (°).
Types of angle

Right angle Half turn Full turn Acute angle Obtuse angle Reflex angle
90° 180° 360° less than 90° between 90° and 180° between 180° and 360°

84
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:18 Page 85

A Describing angles A Describing triangles

The angle at B can be The triangle can be represented by ABC.
written as: It has three vertices, A, B and C;
∠ B or ∠ ABC or ABC three angles, ∠A, ∠B and ∠C;
B C C B
three sides, AB, AC and BC.

Example 7.1 Describe the geometric properties of these two shapes.

a Isosceles triangle ABC b Parallelogram ABCD
A A B

B C D C
AB = AC AB = CD and AD = BC
∠ABC = ∠ACB AB is parallel to CD or AB // CD
AD is parallel to BC or AD // BC

Exercise 7A

a b
Write down which of the angles below are acute, which are obtuse and which are
reflex. Estimate the size of each one.
c d e f
4

For the shape ABCDE: A

a Write down two lines that are equal in length.
b Write down two lines that are parallel. E B
c Write down two lines that are perpendicular to each other.
d Copy the diagram and draw on the two diagonals BD
and CE. What do you notice about the two diagonals?

Write down the geometric properties of these three shapes. D C

a Equilateral triangle ABC b Square ABCD c Rhombus ABCD

A A B A

D B

C B D C C

Write down four different places in the classroom where you can see:
a parallel lines b perpendicular lines

85
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:18 Page 86

6 1 For the regular hexagon ABCDEF:

a Write down all the pairs of sides that are parallel.
b Write down all the diagonals that are perpendicular.
2 Cut the rectangle ABCD into two parts with one straight cut. How many
different shapes can you make? Draw a diagram to show each different
cut you use.

Calculating angles
You can calculate the unknown angles in a diagram from the information given.
Unknown angles are usually denoted by letters, such as a, b, c, … .
Remember: usually the diagrams are not to scale.
Angles around Angles around a point add up to 360°.
a point

Example 7.2 Calculate the size of the angle a.

150° a = 360° – 150° – 130°

a a = 80°

130°

Angles on a Angles on a straight line add up to 180°.

straight line

Example 7.3 Calculate the size of the angle b.

b = 180° – 155°
155°
b b = 25°

Angles in a triangle The angles in a triangle add up to 180°.

a
a + b + c = 180°
b
c

Example 7.4 Calculate the size of the angle c.

70° c = 180° – 70° – 30°

c = 80°
c
30°

86
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:18 Page 87

Vertically opposite When two lines intersect, the opposite angles are equal.
angles a

b c a = d and b = c

Example 7.5 Calculate the sizes of angles d and e.

140°
d = 140° (opposite angles)
e
e = 40° (angles on a straight line)

Exercise 7B Calculate the size of each unknown angle.

a b c d
75° d
110° 110°
120° 102° 98°
a b 72° 67°
c

Calculate the size of each unknown angle.

a b c d
50°
130° 25°
a 75° 49°
c d
b

Calculate the size of each unknown angle.

a b c d

a 35° 35° d
b
55° 45° c 63°
40°

Calculate the size of each unknown angle.

a b c d
d
6
c e
a 138° b
50° 25°
37°

87
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:18 Page 88

Calculate the size of each unknown angle.

6 a
a
b c d
110°
a a 80° 50°
b b
a a
c
a 60° d 40°

1 Calculate the size of each unknown angle.

a b c
c
112°
68°
43°

b
131°
123° 34°
a

86°

2 One angle in an isosceles triangle is 42°. Calculate the possible sizes of

the other two angles.

Coordinates
We use coordinates to locate a point on a grid. y
The grid consists of two axes, called the x-axis and 5
the y-axis. They are perpendicular to each other.
The two axes meet at a point called the origin, 4
B
which is labelled O.
3
The point A on the grid is 4 units across and 3 A
units up.
2
We say that the coordinates of A are (4, 3), which
is usually written as A(4, 3). 1
The first number, 4, is the x-coordinate of A and
the second number, 3, is the y-coordinate of A. x
The x-coordinate is always written first. O 1 2 3 4 5

88
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:18 Page 89

When plotting a point on a grid, a or a ● is usually used.

The coordinates of the origin are (0, 0) and the coordinates of the point B are (1, 4).
The grid system can be extended to negative numbers and points can be plotted in all
four quadrants.

Example 7.6 The coordinates of the points on the grid are:

A(4, 2), B(–2, 3), C(–3, –1), D(1, –4)
y
5
The second quadrant The first quadrant
4

3
B
2
A
1

x
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 O 1 2 3 4 5
–1
C
–2

–3

–4
The third quadrant D The fourth quadrant
–5

Exercise 7C Write down the coordinates

of the points P, Q, R, S and T. 5
y
4
4
P
3
T
2
R
1
Q
S
x
O 1 2 3 4 5

89
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:18 Page 90

a Make a copy of the grid in Question 1. Then plot the points A(1, 1), B(1, 5) and
4 b
C(4, 5).
The three points are the vertices of a rectangle. Plot point D to complete the
rectangle.
c Write down the coordinates of D.

Write down the coordinates of the points A, B, C, D, E, F, G and H.

y
5

4
C
3
A
2

1
B
D
x
–5 –4 –3 –2 –1 O 1 2 3 4 5
–1

–2
E G
–3

–4
F
H
–5

a Make a copy of the grid in Question 3. Then plot the points A(–4, 3), B(–2, –2),
C(0, 1), D(2, –2) and E(4, 3).
b Join the points in the order given. What letter have you drawn?

a Make a copy of the grid in Question 3. Then plot the points W(3, 4), X(3, –2) and
Y(–3, –2).
b The points form three vertices of a square WXYZ. Plot the point Z and draw the
square.
c What are the coordinates of the point Z?
d Draw in the diagonals of the square. What are the coordinates of the point of
intersection of the diagonals?

90
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:18 Page 91

Coordinates and lines

● Draw on a grid x-and y-axes from –8 to 8.
6
● Plot the points (0, 2) and (6, 8) and join them to make a straight line.
● Write down the coordinates of other points that lie on the line.
● Can you spot a rule that connects the x-coordinate and the y-coordinate?
● Extend the line into the third quadrant. Does your rule still work?
● The rule you have found is given by the formula y = x + 2.
● Now draw the following lines on different grids using these formulae:
a y=x+3 b y=x c y=x–2

4 I can recognise acute, obtuse and reflex angles.

I can use coordinates in the first quadrant.

5 I know the geometrical properties of simple 2-D shapes.

I can find angles on a line and around a point.
I can find the angles in a triangle.
I can use coordinates in all four quadrants.

6 I can find angles in intersecting lines.

1 2001 Paper 1

a The point K is halfway between points B and C.

y

A (2, 3) B (5, 3)
4
What are the coordinates of point K?

b Shape ABCD is a rectangle.

What are the coordinates of point D?

D C (5, 1)
x

91
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:18 Page 92

2 2004 4–6 Paper 2

4 I put square tiles on a large grid so that the tiles touch at the corners.
The diagram shows part of my diagonal pattern: 7
y

7
6
a The bottom right-hand corner of tile 2 is marked with a •.
6
Write the coordinates of this point. 5
5
b Tile 4 touches two other tiles. Write the coordinates of the points 4
where tile 4 touches two other tiles. 4
3
c Write the coordinates of the points where tile 17 touches two 3
other tiles. 2
2
1
1
x
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
3 2000 Paper 1
Look at these angles.

Angle P Angle Q Angle R Angle S Angle T

One of the angles measures 120°. Write its letter.

4 2005 4–6 Paper 1

The diagram shows triangle PQR. R

Work out the sizes of angles a, b and c.

Not drawn
30° accurately

c
40°
P Q

92
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:18 Page 93

CHAPTER 8 Statistics 2
This chapter is going to show you What you should already know
How to collect and organise data How to create a tally chart
How to create data collection How to draw bar charts and
forms pictograms
How to create questionnaires
How to use frequency tables to
collate data
How to conduct surveys and
experiments
How to draw simple
conclusions from data

Using a tally chart

What method of transport

do pupils use to travel
to school – and why?

When pupils are asked this question, they will give different methods of travelling, such
as bus, car, bike, walking, train and even some others we don’t yet know about!
A good way to collect this data is to fill in a tally chart as each pupil is asked how he or
she travels to school. For example:

Type of transport Tally Frequency

Bus IIII IIII 9
Car IIII 5
Bike II 2
Walking IIII IIII IIII 14
Other
Total 30

93
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:19 Page 94

In answering the question ‘Why?’, the pupils give the sorts of answers listed below.

Bus Because it’s quicker.

Because it’s too far to walk.
Car My mum goes that way to work.
There’s no bus and it’s too far.
It’s easier than the bus.
Bike It’s better than walking.
Walking It’s not too far. It’s better than a crowded bus.

After the survey, you look at all the reasons given and pick out those which are common
to many pupils. These reasons can be left as a table, or illustrated in different ways.
15
It’s not too far. My mum’s work is that way.
It’s better than a crowded bus. There’s no bus.
Frequency

10
It’s easier than the bus.

0 It’s better than walking.

Bus Car Bike Walk Other
It’s easy and quick.
Because it’s quicker.
Because it’s too far to walk.

It’s not far.

It’s better than a crowded bus.

Exercise 8A
4 Use your own class tally sheet (or the one on page 93) to draw a chart illustrating
the methods of transport used by pupils to get to school, and the reasons why.

A class were asked: ‘Where would you like to go for our form trip?’ They voted as
follows:
Place Tally a Draw a chart illustrating the places
the students wanted to go to.
Alton Towers IIII IIII
b Write suitable reasons why the
Camelot IIII I
students might have voted for each
Blackpool IIII III place and illustrate these reasons.
London III
Bath IIII

Choose five different places to go for a form trip near you and create your own
tally sheet. Collect some data for this sheet, then either create a bar chart with
some reasons on it, or try using a spreadsheet and creating graphs from that.

94
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:19 Page 95

Using the correct data

There are many different newspapers about.
Can you list six different national newspapers? Do certain newspapers
Now consider Ted’s question. The strict way to use more long words than
the other newspapers?
answer this would be to count, in each
newspaper, all the words and all their letters.
But this would take too long, so we take what is
called a sample. We count, say, 100 words from
each newspaper to find the length of each word.

Exercise 8B This whole exercise is a class activity.

a Select one or two pages from a newspaper.

b Create a data capture form (tally chart) like the one below 4
Number of letters Tally Frequency
1
2
3
4
5

c i Select at least two different articles.

ii Count the number of letters in each word and complete the tally.
Note: numbers such as 3, 4, 5 count as 1 letter
numbers such as 15, 58 count as 2 letters
numbers such as 156, 897 count as 3 letters etc.
with hyphenated words, e.g. vice-versa, ignore the hyphen
d Fill in the frequency column.
e Create a bar chart for your results.
f You may find it interesting to compare the differences between the different
newspapers.

Look at the following misleading conclusions that arise from not using like data.

Travelling to school Two different classes did a survey of Jim’s class Noriko’s class
how pupils travelled to school.
They both made pie charts Car Bicycle
to show their results. Walking
Train Train
Bus
Bicycle Car
Bus
Walking

95
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:19 Page 96

Look at both charts and ask yourself:

Which class had the most
pupils using the bus?

Obvious – it’s Jim’s class!

BUT if you are told: In Jim’s class there
were only 24 pupils,
and in Noriko’s class
there were 36 pupils.

Then you will see that:

In Jim’s class, half of the 24 used the bus, which is 12.
In Noriko’s class, more than one third used the bus, which is about 14.
Clearly, you have to be very careful about interpreting data in its final form.
Here, you can say that a bigger proportion of Jim’s class used the bus, but not more pupils
used the bus than in Noriko’s class.
So, it is most important to try to use like numbers of items when you are going to make a
comparison of data from different sources.

Choose a book or magazine that you like and create a bar chart of the
number of letters in each word for selected parts of them (either two
paragraphs or two articles).

Grouped frequency
A class was asked this question and the replies were:
How many times have
you walked to school 6, 3, 5, 20, 15, 11, 13, 28, 30, 5, 2, 6, 8, 18, 23, 22, 17, 13, 4, 2, 30,
this term? 17, 19, 25, 8, 3, 9, 12, 15, 8
There are too many different values here to make a sensible bar chart,
so we group them to produce a grouped frequency table, as shown
below. The different groups the data has been put into are called
classes. Where possible, classes are kept the same size as each other.
Times 1–5 6–10 11–15 16–20 21–25 26–30
Frequency 7 6 6 5 3 3

A bar chart has been drawn 7

from this data and
6
information put on each
bar about some of the 5
When When When
Frequency

reasons. 4 the bus I’ve it’s a Unless

3 fails to missed nice day my dad
turn up the bus give me
2 Unless It’s good
a lift
1 I’m late exercise

0
1–5 6–10 11–15 16–20 21–25 26–30
Number of times

96
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:19 Page 97

Exercise 8C A class did a survey on how many text messages each pupil had sent yesterday. The
results of this survey are:
4, 7, 2, 18, 1, 16, 19, 15, 13, 0, 9, 17, 4, 6, 10, 12, 15, 8, 3, 14, 2, 14, 15, 18, 5, 16,
3, 6, 5, 18, 12
a Create a grouped frequency table with a class size of 5 as below:

Number of texts Tally Frequency

0–4
5–9
10–14
15–19
Total:

b Complete the table using the data above.

c Draw a bar chart of the data.

A teacher asked her class, ‘Count how many times this week you play games on your
computer.’
These were their responses:
3, 6, 9, 2, 23, 18, 6, 8, 29, 27, 2, 1, 0, 5, 19, 23, 13, 21, 7, 4, 23, 8, 7, 1, 0, 25, 24,
8, 13, 18, 15, 16
a Create a grouped frequency table with a class size of 5 as below:

Number of times Tally Frequency

0–4
5–9
10–14
15–19
20–24
25–29
Total:

b Complete the table using the data above.

c Draw a bar chart of the data.

At a youth club, the members were asked, ‘How many times have you played table
tennis this week?’
Their replies were:
5, 8, 1, 15, 7, 2, 0, 4, 8, 10, 6, 16, 3, 2, 1, 1, 5, 1, 6, 9, 2, 3, 4, 3, 2, 16, 15, 0, 4, 2, 11,
15, 6, 7, 3, 1, 2, 13, 6, 5, 3, 1, 2, 2, 5, 6, 8, 12, 1, 3, 1, 1, 0, 0, 15, 4, 3, 5, 2, 1, 12, 8, 1
a Create a grouped frequency table:
i with a class size of 3, i.e. 0–2, 3–5, 6–8, 9–11, 12–14, 15–17
ii with a class size of 5, i.e. 0–4, 5–9, 10–14, 15–19
b Draw a bar chart for each frequency table.
c Which class size seems most appropriate to use?

97
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:19 Page 98

Design a tally chart, with equal class sizes, to capture data in an experiment
to find out how many words there are in sentences in a book.
a Use the tally chart to survey the length of sentences in a book suitable for:
i a 5-year-old ii an 11-year-old iii an adult
b Draw a bar chart from each frequency table.
c Comment on your results.

Data collection
What shall we charge?
What time shall we start?
What time shall we finish?
What food shall we eat?
Let’s have a
disco?

Let’s ask a sample of the pupils in our school these questions. In other words, not
everyone, but a few from each group.
You ask each question, then immediately complete your data collection form.
An example of a suitable data collection form is shown below.

Year Boy How much Time to Time to What would you

group or girl to charge? start? finish? like to eat?
Y7 B £1 7 pm 11 pm Crisps, beefburgers, chips
Y7 G 50p 7 pm 9 pm Chips, crisps, lollies
Y8 G £2 7:30 pm 10 pm Crisps, hot dogs
Y11 B £3 8:30 pm 11:30 pm Chocolate, pizza

Keep Try to ask Once the data is collected,

track of equal it can be sorted into
the age numbers frequency tables.

There are five stages in running this type of survey:

● Deciding what questions to ask and who to ask.
● Creating a simple, suitable data collection form for all the questions.
● Asking the questions and completing the data collection form.
● After collecting all the data, collating it in frequency tables.
● Analysing the data to draw conclusions from the survey.
The size of your sample will depend on many things. It may be simply the first 50 people
you come across. Or you may want 10% of the available people.
In the above example, a good sample would probably be about four from each class, two
boys and two girls.

98
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:19 Page 99

Exercise 8D A class did the above survey on a sample of 10 pupils from each of the Key Stage 3 years.
Their data collection chart is shown on the next page.
a Copy and create the tally chart for the suggested charges from each year group:

Tallies
Charges
Y7 Total Y8 Total Y9 Total
25p
50p
75p
£1
£1.25
£1.50
£2
£2.50
£3

b Comment on the differences between the year groups.

a Copy and create the tally chart for the suggested starting times from each year
group:

Tallies
Times
Y7 Total Y8 Total Y9 Total
7:00 pm
7:30 pm
8:00 pm
8:30 pm

b Comment on the differences between the year groups.

a Copy and create the tally chart for the suggested finishing times from each year
group:

Tallies
Times
Y7 Total Y8 Total Y9 Total
9:00 pm
9:30 pm
10:00 pm
10:30 pm
11:00 pm
11:30 pm

b Comment on the differences between the year groups.

99
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:19 Page 100

a Create and complete a tally chart as before for the food suggestions of each year.
b Comment on the differences between the year groups.

Year Boy How much Time to Time to What would you

group or girl to charge start finish like to eat?
Y7 B £1 7 pm 11 pm Crisps, beefburgers, chips
Y7 G 50p 7 pm 9 pm Chips, crisps, ice pops
Y8 G £2 7:30 pm 10 pm Crisps, hot dogs
Y9 B £3 8:30 pm 11:30 pm Chocolate, pizza
Y9 G £2 8 pm 10 pm Pizza
Y9 B £2.50 7:30 pm 9:30 pm Hot dogs, Chocolate
Y8 G £1 8 pm 10:30 pm Crisps
Y7 B 75p 7 pm 9 pm Crisps, beefburgers
Y7 B £1 7:30 pm 10:30 pm Crisps, ice pops
Y8 B £1.50 7 pm 9 pm Crisps, chips, hot dogs
Y9 G £2 8 pm 11 pm Pizza, chocolate
Y9 G £1.50 8 pm 10:30 pm Chips, pizza
Y9 G £2 8 pm 11 pm Crisps, pizza
Y7 G £1.50 7 pm 9 pm Crisps, ice pops, chocolate
Y8 B £2 7:30 pm 9:30 pm Crisps, ice pops, chocolate
Y8 B £1 8 pm 10 pm Chips, hot dogs
Y9 B £1.50 8 pm 11 pm Pizza
Y7 B 50p 7 pm 9:30 pm Crisps, hot dogs
Y8 G 75p 8 pm 10:30 pm Crisps, chips
Y9 B £2 7:30 pm 10:30 pm Pizza
Y8 G £1.50 7:30 pm 10 pm Chips, hot dogs, chocolate
Y8 B £1.25 7 pm 9:30 pm Chips, hot dogs, ice pops
Y9 G £3 7 pm 9:30 pm Crisps, pizza
Y9 B £2.50 8 pm 10:30 pm Crisps, hot dogs
Y7 G 25p 7:30 pm 10 pm Crisps, beefburgers, ice
pops
Y7 G 50p 7 pm 9 pm Crisps, pizza
Y7 G £1 7 pm 9:30 pm Crisps, pizza
Y8 B £2 8 pm 10 pm Crisps, chips, chocolate
Y8 G £1.50 7:30 pm 9:30 pm Chips, beefburgers
Y7 B £1 7:30 pm 10 pm Crisps, ice pops

100
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:19 Page 101

Investigate the differences between boys and girls as to the suggested length
of time for the disco.

4 I can collect data and record it.

I can represent and interpret collected data in frequency diagrams.

5 I can compare two simple distributions.

I can group data, where appropriate, into equal class intervals.
I can interpret graphs and diagrams, drawing conclusions.

1 1997 Paper 2
Some pupils wanted to find out if people liked a new biscuit.
They decided to do a survey and wrote a questionnaire.

a One question was:

How old are you (in years)?

1 1 1 1 1
20 or younger 20 to 30 30 to 40 40 to 50 50 or over

Mary said:

The labels for the

middle three boxes
need changing.

Explain why Mary was right.

101
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:19 Page 102

b A different question was:

How much do you usually spend on biscuits each week?

1 A lot 1 A little 1 Nothing 1 Don’t know

Mary said: ‘Some of these labels need changing too.’
Write new labels for any boxes that need changing.
You may change as many labels as you want to.

The pupils decide to give their questionnaire to 50 people.

Jon said:

Let’s ask 50 pupils

in our school.

c Give one disadvantage of Jon’s suggestion.

d Give one advantage of Jon’s suggestion.

2 2006 5–7 Paper 2

Wine gums are sweets that are made in different colours.
Pupils tested whether people can taste the difference between black wine gums and other wine gums.
The percentage bar charts show three pupils’ results.

Ravi’s results Sita’s results Tina’s results

100% 100% 100%

80% 80% 80%

60% 60% 60%

40% 40% 40%

20% 20% 20%

0% 0% 0%
Ravi asked Sati asked Tina asked
50 people 100 people 200 people
Key
Cannot taste the difference
Can taste the difference

102
Maths Frameworking PB 7.2 Chs 1–9 14/2/08 17:19 Page 103

a Copy and complete this table.

Number of people Number of people who Number of people who

who were tested can taste the difference cannot taste the difference

Ravi 50
Sita 100
Tina 200

b Explain why Tina’s results are likely to be more reliable than Ravi’s or Sita’s.

103